B-SP2D Series External Equipment Interface ... - Toshiba Tec Italia

TOSHIBA TEC Portable Printer 

B-SP2D Series 

External Equipment Interface Specification 

First Edition: May 9, 2003 

Second Edition: February 18, 2004 

Third Edition: November 30, 2004

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Page 

1. SCOPE/GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................1-1 

1.1 SCOPE ...................................................................................................................................................1-1 

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................................1-1 

1.2.1 SPECIFICATION ORGANIZATION................................................................................................1-1 

2. OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................................2-1 


2.2 DIMENSION............................................................................................................................................2-1 

2.3 WEIGHT .................................................................................................................................................2-1 

2.4 PRINTING METHOD...............................................................................................................................2-1 

2.5 HEAD SPECIFICATION..........................................................................................................................2-1 

2.6 PRINT SPEED ........................................................................................................................................2-1 

2.7 PRINT MODE..........................................................................................................................................2-1 

2.8 FONT TYPE............................................................................................................................................2-2 

2.8.1 BIT MAP FONT...............................................................................................................................2-2 

2.8.2 OUTLINE FONT .............................................................................................................................2-2 

2.9 TYPE OF BAR CODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE...............................................................................2-3 

2.9.1 BAR CODE.....................................................................................................................................2-3 

2.9.2 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE..........................................................................................................2-3 

2.10 FORMAT STORAGE...............................................................................................................................2-3 

2.11 GRAPHIC STORAGE .............................................................................................................................2-3 

2.12 WRITABLE CHARACTER STORAGE....................................................................................................2-3 

2.13 INTERFACE............................................................................................................................................2-4 

2.14 POWER SOURCE..................................................................................................................................2-4 

2.15 BATTERY CAPACITY.............................................................................................................................2-4 

2.16 SWITCH..................................................................................................................................................2-4 

2.17 SENSOR.................................................................................................................................................2-4 

2.18 LED.........................................................................................................................................................2-4 

2.19 ISSUE MODE..........................................................................................................................................2-4 

2.20 PAPER....................................................................................................................................................2-5 

2.21 CUT.........................................................................................................................................................2-5 

2.22 BROKEN HEAD DOTS CHECK FUNCTION ..........................................................................................2-5 

2.23 STATUS TRANSMISSION......................................................................................................................2-5 

2.24 AUTO LABEL POSITIONING FUNCTION ..............................................................................................2-5 

2.25 STATUS PRINTING................................................................................................................................2-5 

2.26 CONTINUOUS PRINTING FUNCTION...................................................................................................2-5 

i

Page 

3. INTERFACE .................................................................................................................................................3-1 


3.2 IrDA INTERFACE (TEC Protocol)...........................................................................................................3-2 

3.2.1 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PHYSICAL LAYER AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD...........3-2 

3.2.2 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ...............................................................................................................3-3 

3.2.3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL..........................................................................................................3-3 

3.2.4 HOW TO SEND THE DATA PRINT COMMAND WHICH CANNOT BE INCLUDED IN 

ONE PACKET IN THE LABEL MODE ............................................................................................3-9 

3.2.5 CONNECTION SEQUENCE EXAMPLE (FOR LABEL MODE) ...................................................3-10 

3.2.6 CONNECTION SEQUENCE EXAMPLE (FOR RECEIPT/TPCL-LE MODES).............................3-14 

3.2.7 PRINTER STATE TRANSITION (FOR LABEL MODE) ................................................................3-15 

3.2.8 PRINTER STATE TRANSITION (FOR RECEIPT/TPCL-LE MODES)..........................................3-16 

3.3 IrDA (IrCOMM) INTERFACE.................................................................................................................3-17 

3.4 RS-232C INTERFACE..........................................................................................................................3-18 

3.4.1 TRANSMISSION CONTROL (XON/XOFF PROTOCOL) .............................................................3-18 

3.4.2 NOTES WHEN SENDING A COMMAND.....................................................................................3-19 

3.5 Bluetooth INTERFACE .........................................................................................................................3-24 

3.5.1 OUTLINED SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................................3-24 

3.5.2 Bluetooth DEVICE ADDRESS (BD address)................................................................................3-24 

3.6 WIRELESS LAN INTERFACE ..............................................................................................................3-25 

3.6.1 OUTLINED SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................................3-25 

3.6.2 MAC ADDRESS ...........................................................................................................................3-25 

4. TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE .....................................................................................................................4-1 


4.2 TPCL-LE MODE......................................................................................................................................4-2 

4.2.1 INITIAL SETTING...........................................................................................................................4-2 

4.2.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION...........................................................................................................4-4 

4.3 LABEL MODE .........................................................................................................................................4-6 


4.3.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION...........................................................................................................4-7 

4.4 RECEIPT MODE.....................................................................................................................................4-8 


4.4.2 RECEIPT ISSUE OPERATION ......................................................................................................4-9 

ii

Page 

5. TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS) ............................................................................................5-1 


5.2 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS ....................................................................................................................5-2 

5.2.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND..........................................................................................5-2 

5.2.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE .........................................................................................................5-2 

5.2.3 PRECAUTIONS..............................................................................................................................5-2 

5.3 COMMANDS RELATED TO SETTING ...................................................................................................5-3 

5.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND [ESC] D ..........................5-3 

5.3.2 PRINTER ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID .........................5-6 

5.3.3 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M..........................5-7 

5.4 COMMANDS RELATED TO FINE ADJUSTMENT ...............................................................................5-10 

5.4.1 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX......................5-10 

5.4.2 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY......................5-12 

5.4.3 STRIP SENSOR THRESHOLD VALUE SET COMMAND [ESC] AH......................5-14 

5.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO CLEAR.....................................................................................................5-15 

5.5.1 IMAGE BUFFER CLEAR COMMAND [ESC] C ........................5-15 

5.5.2 CLEAR AREA COMMAND [ESC] XR......................5-16 

5.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO DRAWING FORMAT ...............................................................................5-18 

5.6.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] LC ......................5-18 

5.6.2 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PC......................5-21 

5.6.3 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PV......................5-32 

5.6.4 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (WPC, CODE128, EAN128, Customer Bar Code) [ESC] XB......................5-41 

5.6.5 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MSI, ITF, CODE39, NW7) [ESC] XB......................5-50 

6.5.6 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)) [ESC]XB......................5-56 

5.6.7 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Data Matrix) [ESC] XB......................5-62 

5.6.8 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (PDF417) [ESC] XB......................5-71 

5.6.9 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MicroPDF417) [ESC] XB......................5-76 

5.6.10 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (QR Code) [ESC] XB......................5-82 

5.6.11 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Maxicode) [ESC] XB......................5-88 

5.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO PRINT DATA ...........................................................................................5-92 

5.7.1 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RC .....................5-92 

5.7.2 OUTLINE FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RV......................5-94 

5.7.3 BAR CODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE DATA COMMAND 

(Any codes other than Maxicode) 

[ESC] RB......................5-96 

5.7.4 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE DATA COMMAND (Maxicode) [ESC] RB....................5-108 

iii

Page 

5.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO ISSUE AND FEED.................................................................................5-109 

5.8.1 ISSUE COMMAND [ESC] XS....................5-109 

5.8.2 FEED COMMAND [ESC] T ......................5-112 

5.9 COMMANDS RELATED TO FORMAT................................................................................................5-114 

5.9.1 FLASH MEMORY FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1 ...........................................5-114 

5.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO WRITABLE CHARACTERS...................................................................5-115 

5.10.1 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND [ESC] XD ..........................................5-115 

5.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO GRAPHICS............................................................................................5-122 

5.11.1 GRAPHIC COMMAND [ESC] SG..........................................5-122 

5.12 COMMANDS RELATED TO PC COMMAND SAVING .......................................................................5-128 

5.12.1 SAVE START COMMAND [ESC] XO..........................................5-128 

5.12.2 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND [ESC] XP ..........................................5-129 

5.12.3 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND [ESC] XQ..........................................5-130 

5.13 COMMANDS RELATED TO CHECK ..................................................................................................5-131 

5.13.1 HEAD BROKEN DOTS CHECK COMMAND [ESC] HD..........................................5-131 

5.14 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL .............................................................................................5-132 

5.14.1 RESET COMMAND [ESC] WR.........................................5-132 

5.15 COMMANDS RELATED TO STATUS ................................................................................................5-133 

5.15.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WS, [ESC] FM, [ESC] v..........5-133 

5.15.2 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX .........................................5-135 

5.15.3 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WV .........................................5-136 

5.16 COMMANDS RELATED TO Bluetooth AND WIRELESS LAN ...........................................................5-138 

5.16.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT............................................5-138 

6. LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)................................................................................................6-1 





6.2.3 PRECAUTIONS..............................................................................................................................6-2 


6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND [ESC] D ................................................6-3 

6.3.2 ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID ...............................................6-5 

6.3.3 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M ................................................6-6 

iv

Page 

6.4 COMMANDS RELATED TO FINE ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................6-9 

6.4.1 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX ..............................................6-9 

6.4.2 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY ............................................6-11 

6.4.3 STRIP SENSOR ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AZ ............................................6-12 

6.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO DRAWING FORMAT ...............................................................................6-13 

6.5.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] LC ......................6-13 

6.5.2 BIT MAP FONT FIELD COMMAND [ESC] PC......................6-15 

6.5.3 OUTLINE FONT FIELD COMMAND [ESC] PV......................6-20 

6.5.4 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MSI, ITF, CODE39, NW7) [ESC] XB......................6-28 

6.5.5 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (JAN8/EAN8, JAN13/EAN13) [ESC] XB......................6-30 

6.5.6 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (EAN128) [ESC] XB......................6-31 

6.5.7 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (CODE128) [ESC] XB......................6-32 

6.5.8 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Customer Bar Code) [ESC] XB......................6-34 

6.5.9 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (PDF417) [ESC] XB......................6-35 

6.5.10 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (QR Code) [ESC] XB......................6-38 

6.5.11 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Data Matrix) [ESC] XB......................6-40 

6.5.12 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MircoPDF417) [ESC] XB......................6-42 

6.5.13 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Maxicode) [ESC] XB......................6-43 

6.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO ISSUE AND FEED...................................................................................6-49 

6.6.1 DATA PRINT COMMAND [ESC] X ........................6-49 

6.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO FORMAT..................................................................................................6-55 

6.7.1 FLASH MEMORY STORAGE AREA FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1.......................6-55 

6.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO WRITABLE CHARACTERS.....................................................................6-56 

6.8.1 WRITABLE CHARACTER DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] XD......................6-56 

6.9 COMMANDS RELATED TO GRAPHICS..............................................................................................6-58 

6.9.1 GRAPHIC DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] SG .....................6-58 

6.9.2 GRAPHIC FIELD COMMAND [ESC] N ........................6-60 

6.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO PC COMMAND SAVING .........................................................................6-61 

6.10.1 FORM STORE START COMMAND [ESC] XO .....................6-61 

6.10.2 FORM STORE TERMINATE COMMAND [ESC] XP......................6-62 

6.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL ...............................................................................................6-63 

6.11.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] WR, [ESC] @ ....6-63 

6.12 COMMANDS RELATED TO STATUS ..................................................................................................6-64 

6.12.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS, [ESC] v......6-64 

6.12.2 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX.....................6-66 

6.13 COMMANDS RELATED TO Bluetooth AND WIRELESS LAN .............................................................6-67 

6.13.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT .......................6-67 

v

Page 

7. RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS) ............................................................................................7-1 





7.2.3 PRECAUTIONS..............................................................................................................................7-3 


7.3.1 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M.....................................7-4 


7.4.1 LINE FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] 3......................................7-7 

7.4.2 PRINT POSITION ALIGN COMMAND [ESC] a......................................7-8 

7.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO DRAWING FORMAT .................................................................................7-9 

7.5.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] L......................................7-9 

7.5.2 FONT TYPE COMMAND [ESC] K ...................................7-10 

7.5.3 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] KV .................................7-11 

7.5.4 BAR CODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE PRINT COMMAND [GS] k ......................................7-12 

7.5.5 CHARACTER MAGNIFICATION COMMAND [ESC] !.....................................7-14 

7.5.6 BAR CODE HORIZONTAL SIZE COMMAND [GS] w .....................................7-15 

7.5.7 BAR CODE HEIGHT COMMAND [GS] h ......................................7-16 

7.5.8 NUMERALS UNDER BARS COMMAND [GS] Hn ...................................7-17 

7.5.9 SECURITY LEVEL COMMAND [GS] s ......................................7-18 

7.5.10 NO. OF COLUMNS (STRINGS) COMMAND [GS] c ......................................7-19 

7.5.11 PRINT WIDTH COMMAND [ESC] W ..................................7-20 

7.5.12 HORIZONTAL PRINT POSITION COMMAND [ESC] H ...................................7-21 

7.5.13 HORIZONTAL OFFSET POSITION COMMAND [ESC] O ...................................7-23 

7.5.14 CHARACTER ROTATE COMMAND [ESC] R ...................................7-25 

7.5.15 ERROR CORRECTION LEVEL SET COMMAND (For QR Code) [GS] q ......................................7-26 

7.5.16 QR CODE MODEL SET COMMAND [GS] r.......................................7-27 

7.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO ISSUE AND FEED...................................................................................7-28 

7.6.1 PRINT LINE FEED COMMAND [LF]..........................................7-28 

7.6.2 BACK FEED OMISSION COMMAND [ESC]B ....................................7-29 

7.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO GRAPHICS..............................................................................................7-30 

7.7.1 GRAPHIC DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] SG.................................7-30 

7.7.2 GRAPHIC PRINT COMMAND [GS] / .......................................7-32 

vi

Page 

7.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL ...............................................................................................7-33 

7.8.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] @, [ESC] WR................7-33 


7.9.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] v, [ [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS....7-34 

7.9.2 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX......................................7-36 

7.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO Bluetooth AND WIRELESS LAN .............................................................7-37 

7.10.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT ........................................7-37 

7.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO MACRO SETTING...................................................................................7-38 

7.11.1 MACRO DEFINITION COMMAND [GS] :.............................................7-38 

7.11.2 MACRO EXECUTE COMMAND [GS] ^ [NUL] .....................7-39 

7.12 EXAMPLES OF USING COMMANDS ..................................................................................................7-40 

8. ERROR PROCESSING................................................................................................................................8-1 


8.2 OPERATIONS WHEN AN ERROR OCCURS ........................................................................................8-2 

8.3 OPERATIONS AFTER AN ERROR IS CLEARED..................................................................................8-2 

8.3.1 LABEL MODE.................................................................................................................................8-2 

8.3.2 RECEIPT MODE (Mode = 1 or 3)...................................................................................................8-2 

8.3.3 RECEIPT1 MODE (Mode = 2)........................................................................................................8-2 

8.3.4 TPCL-LE MODE .............................................................................................................................8-2 

8.4 SYNTAX ERRORS OF COMMANDS .....................................................................................................8-2 

8.5 PAPER JAM............................................................................................................................................8-2 

8.6 LABEL END ............................................................................................................................................8-3 

8.6.1 LABEL MODE, RECEIPT MODE (Mode = 1 or 3), TPCL-LE MODE..............................................8-3 

8.6.2 RECEIPT1 MODE (Mode = 2)........................................................................................................8-3 

8.7 NORMAL END + LABEL END ................................................................................................................8-3 

8.7.1 LABEL MODE, TPCL-LE MODE ....................................................................................................8-3 

8.7.2 RECEIPT MODE ............................................................................................................................8-3 

8.8 COVER OPEN ERROR ..........................................................................................................................8-3 

8.9 BROKEN THERMAL HEAD DOTS ERROR ...........................................................................................8-3 

8.10 THERMAL HEAD EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURE ...................................................................................8-3 

8.11 FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR.................................................................................................................8-3 

8.12 FLASH ROM ERASE ERROR ................................................................................................................8-4 

8.13 FLASH ROM STORAGE AREA FULL ....................................................................................................8-4 

8.14 LOW BATTERY ......................................................................................................................................8-4 

8.15 OTHER ERRORS ...................................................................................................................................8-4 

8.16 STATUS VALUES...................................................................................................................................8-5 

vii

Page 

9. SYSTEM MODE ...........................................................................................................................................9-1 


9.2 STARTING THE PRINTER IN SYSTEM MODE .....................................................................................9-1 

9.3 COMMUNICATIONS CONDITIONS .......................................................................................................9-2 

9.3.1 IrDA ................................................................................................................................................9-2 

9.3.2 RS-232C.........................................................................................................................................9-2 

9.3.3 Bluetooth ........................................................................................................................................9-2 

9.3.4 WIRELESS LAN.............................................................................................................................9-2 

9.4 LIMITATIONS IN SYSTEM MODE..........................................................................................................9-2 




9.5.3 PRECAUTIONS..............................................................................................................................9-3 


9.6.1 ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID..........................................9-4 

9.6.2 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M...........................................9-5 


9.7.1 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY.........................................9-7 

9.7.2 STRIP SENSOR THRESHOLD VALUE SET COMMAND [ESC] AH, [ESC] AZ........................9-8 

9.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL .................................................................................................9-9 

9.8.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] WR, [ESC] @ .......................9-9 


9.9.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS, [ESC] v......9-10 

9.9.2 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX......................................9-13 

9.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO PARAMETER SETTING ..........................................................................9-14 

9.10.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND [ESC] ZZ .......................................9-14 

9.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO Bluetooth .................................................................................................9-16 

9.11.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT ........................................9-16 

9.12 STATUS PRINTING..............................................................................................................................9-17 

9.12.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ...........................................................................................................9-17 

9.12.2 CONTENTS TO BE PRINTED......................................................................................................9-17 

9.12.3 PRINT SAMPLE ...........................................................................................................................9-18 

9.13 SETUP MODE ......................................................................................................................................9-22 

9.13.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ...........................................................................................................9-22 

9.13.2 PRINTER CONDITIONS TO CHANGE SETTINGS......................................................................9-22 

viii

Page 

9.13.3 HOW TO ENTER INTO SETUP MODE........................................................................................9-22 

9.13.4 HOW TO RETURN TO SYSTEM MODE DURING SETTING ......................................................9-22 

9.13.5 AUTO POWER-OFF FUNCTION DURING SETTING..................................................................9-22 

9.13.6 HOW TO CANCEL EACH SETUP MODE....................................................................................9-22 

9.13.7 HOW TO CHECK EACH MODE SETTING ..................................................................................9-22 

9.13.8 OTHER.........................................................................................................................................9-22 

9.13.9 FORCED IrCOMM MODE ............................................................................................................9-23 

9.13.10 SETUP MENU ..............................................................................................................................9-23 

9.13.11 IrDA COMMUNICATION SETUP MENU ......................................................................................9-24 

9.13.12 BAUD RATE SETUP MENU.........................................................................................................9-25 

9.13.13 PARITY SETUP MENU ................................................................................................................9-26 

9.13.14 AUTO POWER-OFF TIME SETUP MENU...................................................................................9-27 

9.13.15 MODEL TYPE (DESTINATION) SETUP MENU...........................................................................9-28 

10. OTHER FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................................10-1 

10.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................................10-1 

10.2 REPRINT FUNCTION...........................................................................................................................10-2 

10.2.1 LABEL MODE...............................................................................................................................10-2 

10.2.2 RECEIPT MODE ..........................................................................................................................10-2 

10.2.3 TPCL-LE MODE ...........................................................................................................................10-2 

10.3 POWER SAVE MODE ..........................................................................................................................10-2 

10.4 AUTOMATIC LABEL PRINT POSITIONING.........................................................................................10-3 

10.4.1 LABEL MODE, TPCL-LE MODE ..................................................................................................10-3 

10.4.2 RECEIPT MODE ..........................................................................................................................10-3 

10.5 CONTINUOUS PRINTING FUNCTION.................................................................................................10-3 

10.5.1 LABEL MODE, RECEIPT MODE (Mode = 1 or 3) ........................................................................10-3 

10.5.2 RECEIPT1 MODE (Mode = 2), TPCL-LE MODE..........................................................................10-3 

10.6 AUTOMATIC LABEL PRINT POSITIONING AT POWER ON TIME.....................................................10-3 

10.7 BD ADDRESS PRINTING FUNCTION .................................................................................................10-3 

10.8 WIRELESS LAN PARAMETER SETTINGS PRINTING FUNCTION ....................................................10-4 

11. CHARACTER CODE TABLE.....................................................................................................................11-1 


11.2 TIMES ROMAN.....................................................................................................................................11-2 

11.3 HELVETICA ..........................................................................................................................................11-2 

11.4 LETTER GOTHIC .................................................................................................................................11-3 

11.5 PRESTIGE ELITE.................................................................................................................................11-3 

ix

Page 

11.6 COURIER .............................................................................................................................................11-4 

11.7 GOTHIC725 BLACK .............................................................................................................................11-4 

11.8 PRESENTATION ..................................................................................................................................11-5 

11.9 STANDARD (12×24).............................................................................................................................11-5 

11.10 OCR-A ..................................................................................................................................................11-6 

11.11 OCR-B ..................................................................................................................................................11-6 

11.12 PRICE FONT 1/PRICE FONT 2............................................................................................................11-7 

11.13 BOLD CHARACTER .............................................................................................................................11-7 

11.14 OUTLINE FONT TEC FONT 1 ..............................................................................................................11-8 

11.15 OUTLINE FONT PRICE FONT 2 ..........................................................................................................11-8 

12. BAR CODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE.....................................................................................12-1 


12.2 JAN8/EAN8, JAN13/EAN13, UPC-A, UPC-E, ITF, EAN128, MSI, RSS-14, RSS-14 STACKED, 

RSS-14 STACKED OMNIDIRECTIONAL, RSS-LIMITED.....................................................................12-2 

12.3 CODE39 (STANDARD).........................................................................................................................12-2 

12.4 NW-7.....................................................................................................................................................12-3 

12.5 CUSTOMER BAR CODE, HIGHEST PRIORITY CUSTOMER BAR CODE .........................................12-3 

12.6 CODE128..............................................................................................................................................12-4 

12.6.1 TRANSFER CODE.......................................................................................................................12-4 

12.6.2 HOW TO SEND CONTROL CODE DATA....................................................................................12-4 

12.6.3 HOW TO SEND SPECIAL CODES..............................................................................................12-4 

12.6.4 DESIGNATION OF START CODE ...............................................................................................12-4 

12.6.5 VALUE CODE TABLE ..................................................................................................................12-5 

12.7 RSS EXPANDED..................................................................................................................................12-6 

12.8 DATA MATRIX ......................................................................................................................................12-7 

12.8.1 FORMAT ID..................................................................................................................................12-7 

12.8.2 TRANSFER CODE.......................................................................................................................12-7 



12.9 PDF417, MicroPDF417.........................................................................................................................12-8 

12.9.1 MODE/CODE ...............................................................................................................................12-8 

12.9.2 TRANSFER CODE.......................................................................................................................12-8 



x

Page 

12.10 MAXICODE.........................................................................................................................................12-10 

12.10.1 HOW TO SEND CONTROL CODE DATA..................................................................................12-11 

12.10.2 HOW TO SEND SPECIAL CODES............................................................................................12-11 

12.11 QR CODE ...........................................................................................................................................12-12 

12.11.1 MODE SELECTION....................................................................................................................12-12 

12.11.2 TRANSFER CODE.....................................................................................................................12-12 

12.11.3 HOW TO SEND CONTROL CODE DATA..................................................................................12-13 

12.11.4 HOW TO SEND SPECIAL CODES............................................................................................12-13 

12.12 START/STOP CODE ..........................................................................................................................12-13 

13. PRINT SAMPLE.........................................................................................................................................13-1 

13.1 BIT MAP FONT.....................................................................................................................................13-1 

13.2 OUTLINE FONT....................................................................................................................................13-5 

xi

1. SCOPE/GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

1. SCOPE/GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

1.1 SCOPE 

This specification applies to the software that is used with the B-SP2D probate printer. 

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

The external equipment interface connects a printer to the host computer through the RS-232C, IrDA, 

Bluetooth TM , or wireless LAN interface for storing forms, or issuing labels or receipts. This specification 

describes how to use the external equipment interface and the [FEED] switch. The specification is 

organized as below. Refer to each chapter according to your needs. 

1.2.1 SPECIFICATION ORGANIZATION 

Chapter 1: SCOPE/GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

Chapter 2: OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS 

Chapter 3: INTERFACE 

Chapter 4: TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE 

Chapter 5: TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS) 

Chapter 6: LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS) 

Chapter 7: RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS) 

Chapter 8: ERROR PROCESSING 

Chapter 9: SYSTEM MODE 

Chapter 10: OTHER FUNCTIONS 

Chapter 11: CHARACTER CODE TABLE 

Chapter 12: BAR CODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE 

* BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to TOSHIBA TEC 

Corporation. 

* Other company names or product names described in this document are registered trademarks or 

trademarks of respective companies. 

1-1

2. OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS 



This chapter describes the outline of specifications – modes which the printer has. For more details, 

refer to the appropriate chapter. 

„ [TPCL-LE (TEC Printer Command Language Light Edition) mode] 

The printer draws data according to the format information and print data sent from the host, and 

issues labels according to the Issue Command. 

„ [LABEL mode] 

The label format information, graphic data, or writable character data sent from the host, is 

previously stored in flash ROM as an initial setting. The printer links the print data sent through its 

interface to the format data or writable character data in flash ROM, then prints. 

„ [RECEIPT mode] 

The printer draws and issues according to the data or commands sent from the host. 

„ [SYSTEM mode] 

In this mode, self-test printing, slant line printing, or settings/changing of internal parameters are 

performed. 

2.2 DIMENSION 

114 (W) × 91 (D) × 44 (L) mm (excluding the belt holder and cover open lever, etc.) 

* 114 (W) x 101 (D) x 44 (L) mm (for the wireless LAN interface model) 

2.3 WEIGHT 

Approx. 380 g (including a battery, excluding paper) 

* Approx. 410 g (for the wireless LAN interface model) 

2.4 PRINTING METHOD 

Direct thermal 

2.5 HEAD SPECIFICATION 

8 dots/mm (203 dpi) 

Effective print width: 48 mm 

2.6 PRINT SPEED 

Approx. 12.5 mm/sec to Approx. 80 mm/sec 

(at 25°C when using the battery designated and paper recommended by Toshiba TEC) 

2.7 PRINT MODE 

• LABEL mode 

• RECEIPT mode 

• TPCL-LE mode 

2-1


2.8 FONT TYPE 

2.8.1 BIT MAP FONT 

• Standard character/Characters under bars..............12 × 24 dots 

• Bold character ..........................................................48 × 96 dots 

• Price Font 1 ..............................................................16 × 40 dots 

• Price Font 2 ..............................................................32 × 48 dots 

• Times Roman (Medium) ..........................................12 point 

• Times Roman (Medium) ..........................................15 point 

• Times Roman (Bold) ................................................15 point 



• Times Roman (Italic) ................................................18 point 

• Helvetica (Medium) ..................................................9 point 



• Helvetica (Bold) ........................................................18 point 

• Helvetica (Bold) ........................................................21 point 

• Helvetica (Italic)........................................................18 point 

• Presentation (Bold)...................................................27 point 

• Letter Gothic (Medium) ............................................14.3 point 

• Prestige Elite (Medium) ...........................................10.5 point 

• Prestige Elite (Bold)..................................................15 point 

• Courier (Medium) .....................................................15 point 

• Courier (Bold) ...........................................................18 point 

• OCR-A......................................................................12 point 

• OCR-B......................................................................12 point 

• GOTHIC725 Black ...................................................6 point 

• Writable character ....................................................16 × 16 dots 

• Writable character ....................................................24 × 24 dots 

NOTE: Some fonts cannot be printed depending on the print mode. 

2.8.2 OUTLINE FONT 

• TEC Font 1 (Not proportional) 

• TEC Font 1 (Proportional) 

• Price Font 2 (* Firmware V1.2 or greater) 

NOTE: Some fonts cannot be printed depending on the print mode. 

2-2


2.9 TYPE OF BAR CODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE 

2.9.1 BAR CODE 

• JAN8/EAN8 

• JAN13/EAN13 

• UPC-A 

• UPC-E 

• Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 

• NW7 

• CODE39 

• CODE128 

• EAN128 

• MSI 

• Customer bar code 

• RSS (* Firmware V1.2 or greater) 

NOTE: Some bar codes cannot be printed depending on the print mode. 

2.9.2 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE 

• QR code 

• PDF417 

• Data Matrix 

• Maxicode 

• MicroPDF417 

NOTE: Some two-dimensional codes cannot be printed depending on the print mode. 

2.10 FORMAT STORAGE 

LABEL mode.........Max. 20 types can be stored. (Form storage) 

TPCL-LE mode .....Max. 99 types can be stored. (PC saving) 

Storage capacity: 128KB 


2.11 GRAPHIC STORAGE 

Two graphic data can be stored. (Max. 48 × 90 Kbytes) 


2.12 WRITABLE CHARACTER STORAGE 

LABEL mode.........24 × 24 dots: Max. 50 writable characters can be stored 

TPCL-LE mode .....Free size: Max. 224 writable characters can be stored 

16 × 16 dots: Max. 188 writable characters can be stored 

24 × 24 dots: Max. 188 writable characters can be stored. 

Storage capacity: 

64KB in total 

2.13 INTERFACE 

• IrDA V1.2 (IrCOMM, TEC Protocol) 

• RS-232C 

• Bluetooth V1.1 (Class 2) 

• Wireless LAN (802.11b) 

2-3


2.14 POWER SOURCE 

Type: Lithium-ion battery 

Voltage: 7.4 V 1400 mAH (Nominal values) 

Charging method: Charge only the battery using the battery charger. 

2.15 BATTERY CAPACITY 

• 300 sheets (48 (W) × 40 (H) mm label) printed/charged once 

• Print ratio: 30% 

• Ambient temperature: 25°C 

NOTE: 

The printable number of labels may vary depending on the contents to be printed. 

2.16 SWITCH 

POWER switch 

FEED switch 

2.17 SENSOR 

Cover open sensor 

Transmissive sensor 

Reflective sensor 

Strip issue path detection sensor 

Head temperature sensor 

Ambient temperature sensor 

2.18 LED 

LED (Green, Orange, Red) 

When the printer is turned ON ..........First, the LED blinks in red, secondly, blinks in green, and then 

changes color depending on the battery level. 

Battery level 3 or greater: 

Battery level 2 or greater: 

Battery level 1: 

Power ON → Blinks in red → Blinks in green → Lights in green 

Power ON → Blinks in red → Blinks in green → Lights in orange 

Power ON → Blinks in red → Blinks in green → Lights in red 

Error .................................................Blinks in red. 

Low battery (print failure) ..................Lights up in red. 

Near-low battery................................Lights up in orange. 

2.19 ISSUE MODE 

Strip issue 

Batch issue 

2-4


2.20 PAPER (Toshiba TEC recommended paper should be used.) 

Label width ........................................25 to 55 mm 

Gap length between labels................3 to 7 mm 

Black mark length .............................3 to 7 mm 

Backing paper width..........................28 to 58 mm 

Receipt paper width ..........................28 to 58 mm 

Paper replacing method....................Label loading-in method 

2.21 CUT 

Manual cut using the tear bar 

2.22 BROKEN HEAD DOTS CHECK FUNCTION 

When the printer is turned ON, or the cover is closed, the program will check for broken head dots. If 

broken head dots are detected, a broken head dot error will occur. 

2.23 STATUS TRANSMISSION 

The printer sends a status when: 

• The host requests status transmission. 

• The printer receives a command, while it is in an error state. 

• Automatic status transmission in the Issue Command has already been designated. 

2.24 AUTO LABEL POSITIONING FUNCTION 

When the cover is closed after replacing the label paper, the label is automatically fed to the first print 

position. However, when the RECEIPT mode is selected or no sensor is designated, this function is 

not performed. 

2.25 STATUS PRINTING 

When the printer is turned ON while holding down the [FEED] switch, self-test is performed and the 

result of the printer’s state will be printed. 

2.26 CONTINUOUS PRINTING FUNCTION 

When the RECEIPT mode (Mode = 2), TPCL-LE mode (Mode = A), or TPCL-LE1 mode (Mode = B) 

is selected, the received data is continuously printed, after an error state (label end, cover open error, 

or a paper jam) is cleared. After the paper is replaced, when the cover is closed, the error is cleared. 

The printer automatically restarts printing. If the printer is in the label end state when the cover is 

closed, the printer neither clears the error nor performs automatic printing. The printer is still in an 

error state. 

2-5

3. INTERFACE 

3. INTERFACE 


This chapter describes details on the interfaces between the host and the printer. The printer 

configurations are as follows: 

• IrDA + RS-232C model 

• IrDA + Bluetooth model 

• IrDA + Wireless LAN model 

IrDA has the following two protocols. These explanations are independently described on later pages. 

• TEC Protocol 

• IrCOMM (9-WIRE) 

The printer interface is automatically switched between IrDA and RS-232C/Bluetooth/wireless LAN on 

the following conditions: 

• IrDA+RS-232C model 

When the RS-232C cable is connected to the printer, the printer interface will be switched to the 

RS-232C interface. When the RS-232C cable is disconnected, the interface will be switched to 

IrDA. 

• IrDA+Bluetooth model or IrDA+Wireless LAN model 

Usually, IrDA interface is standing by for a communication. When data is sent from Bluetooth 

interface or wireless LAN interface, the printer interface is automatically switched to the appropriate 

interface. 

When over 5 seconds have passed since the termination of the communication by Bluetooth or 

wireless LAN interface, the printer interface will return to IrDA. Therefore, communication by IrDA 

cannot be made during or within 5 seconds after the communication by Bluetooth or wireless LAN 

interface. 

If data is sent to the printer by Bluetooth or wireless LAN interface during the communication by 

IrDA, the printer interface will be automatically switched to Bluetooth or wireless LAN, and 

consequently the communication by IrDA cannot be made successfully. 

3-1

3. INTERFACE 

3.2 IrDA INTERFACE (TEC Protocol) 

In IrDA standard, only IrDA-SIR of the physical layer should be used. For the data link layer, original 

simplified protocol should be provided. 

3.2.1 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PHYSICAL LAYER AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD 

Transport layer 

IrLMP 

Simplified protocol 

IrLAP 

IrDA-SIR 

IrDA V1.2 (Low Power) standard 

IrDA-SIR 

B-SP2D 

: parts are required. 

(1) Specifications for physical layer 

Item 

Specifications 

Normal mode 

Communication mode Physical layer conforming to IrDA-SIR V1.2 

(Low Power) standard 

Transfer rate 9600, 19200, 38400, 115200 bps *1 

Communication distance within 0.1 m *2 

Peak wave length of 850 to 900 nm 

emitted light 

Communicable angle within ±15° 

Ambient illuminance 1000 lx or less 

(fluorescent lamp and incandescent lamp) 

Emissive power Min 3.6 mW/Sr (θh, θv ≤ ±15°) 

Min. photo sensibility Min 9 µW/cm 2 (θh, θv ≤ ±15°) 

*1: Values for the normal mode are dependent on the communication protocol settings. 

*2: The communication distance may become shorter than 0.1 m, depending on the host’s 

performance. 

3-2

3. INTERFACE 

3.2.2 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL 

• RD (Host → Printer) 

A data signal which the printer receives from the host. 

Logic 1 is Low level, while logic 0 is High level. 

It is in a Low state when no transmission is in progress. 

• SD (Printer → Host) 

A data signal which the printer sends to the host. 

Logic 1 is Low level, while logic 0 is High level. 

It is in a Low state when no transmission is in progress. 

3.2.3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL 

The host performs transmission control with a NAK (15H)/ACK (06H), which means the printer is 

ready, a link request PAD (FFH), and a command packet. 

c Link request (Host → Printer) 

The host should send a link request PAD (FFH) in order to link to the printer. The link request 

PAD should be intermittently sent until the printer is linked and enters a ready state. 

d Printer ready (Printer → Host) 

When the printer detects the link request PAD from the host, and enters a ready state for 

receiving the command packet, the printer sends a NAK within 40 msec. When an error such 

as CRC occurs, the printer sends a NAK. 

NAK 

15H 

The printer sends an ACK, when the printer properly receives the command packet and enters 

a ready state for receiving the next data, or when the data is stored into flash ROM. 

ACK 

06H 

e End of link (Host → Printer) 

When there is no packet to be sent, the host sends an EOT to end the link. 

EOT 

04H 

f Turnaround time 

The printer should send a NAK/ACK/status packet after 5 ms from when a PAD/command 

packet has been received. 

g Time out 

Host: 

Time out due to waiting for a NAK after a PAD is sent ................................ 50 msec. 

Time out due to waiting for an ACK after a command is sent ..................... 200 msec. 

Printer: Time out due to waiting for a command after a NAK is sent ....................... 1 sec. 

Time out due to waiting for an EOT or a command after an ACK is sent.... 1 sec. 

Time out due to waiting for an EOT after the status is sent......................... 1 sec. 

3-3

3. INTERFACE 

h Status packet (Printer → Host) 

If the printer enters an error state when the command is sent from the host, or when status 

transmission is requested, the printer sends a status. 

NOTE: The data error is checked by CRC. However, noise included in sent/received data 

may cause misprinting. (Though CRC check is carried out in 16 bits, there is a 

possibility that the data including noise matches 16 bits of CRC check.) 

[LABEL/RECEIPT modes] 

Data to be sent 

STX Printer ID Version No. of each form Printer status Battery status CRC 

02H xxH xxH V01 V02 ··········· V20 xxH xxH xxH xxH 

Range of CRC calculation 

• Printer ID ......... 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low) 

• Version No. of each form (00H to 09H) 

V01 ............... Version of form No. 1 (1-byte hex data) 



• Printer status ... Printer status is indicated in 1-byte data. 

00H: Normal status (Idling) 

01H: Cover open status 

02H: Command syntax error 

03H: Paper jam 

04H: Label end 

05H: Cover open error 

06H: Broken thermal head dots error 

07H: Thermal head excessive temperature 

08H: Flash ROM write error 

09H: Flash ROM erase error 

0AH: Low battery (Print failure) 

0BH: Operating 

0DH: Normal end + Label end 

0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state 

10H: Normal end 

• Battery status .. The battery charge status is indicated in 5 levels. 

01H: 7.2 V or less (Print failure) 

02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V 

(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 1 to 20) 

03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V 


04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V 


05H: 8.0 V or more 

(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 200 or more) 

* The remaining number of printable labels may vary according to the 

contents to be printed and the ambient environment. 

3-4

3. INTERFACE 

[TPCL-LE mode] 


STX Printer ID Status Remaining No. of labels CRC 

02H xxH xxH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH xxH xxH 



• Status .............. Detailed status indicated in 2-byte data 

“00”: Normal state 

“01”: Cover open state 

“02”: Operating 

“06”: Command syntax error 

“09”: Normal issue end + Label end 

“11”: Paper jam 

“13”: Label end 

“15”: Cover open error 

“17”: Broken head dots error 

“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature 

“36”: Low battery 

“40”: Normal issue end 

“41”: Normal feed end 

“50”: Flash ROM write error 

“51”: Flash ROM erase error 

“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state 

• Status type ...... Indicated in 1-byte data 

“1”: Status Request Command 

“2”: Automatic status transmission 

• Remaining No. of labels .... Indicated in 4-byte data 

“0000” to “9999” 

3-5

3. INTERFACE 

i Command packet in the LABEL mode (Host → Printer) 

Length is designated in 1 byte: 

STX Printer ID Length Command CRC 

02H xxH xxH xxH xxH xxH 

Length is designated in 2 bytes: 

Range of the length 

STX Printer ID Length Command CRC 

02H xxH xxH 00H xxH xxH xxH xxH 




• Length ............. Hex data indicating the number of bytes of command data 

• When the length is designated in 1 byte: 1 byte 

01H to FFH 

• When the length is designated in 2 bytes: 3 bytes 

The first 1 byte is fixed as 00H. 

Designate the length using the remaining 2 bytes. 

(in order from Low to High): 0001 H to 0FFFH 

• CRC ................ 2-byte hex data (in order from Low to High) 

* Between the start and the termination of storing the form, a packet including several commands 

can be sent. However, the command data should not be included in two packets. For other 

commands, one packet should include only one command. 

* For all commands except the Graphic Data Store Command, data included in several packets 

should not be sent. The Data Print Command can also send data included in several packets if 

it is sent using the format on the next page. 

3-6

3. INTERFACE 

* Multiple packet format for including the Data Print Command in several packets 

(Host → Printer) 


STX Printer ID Length Mode Flag Command & Data CRC 

02H xxH xxH xxH Y xxH xxH xxH 




02H xxH xxH 00H xxH xxH Y xxH xxH xxH 






01H to FFH 





NOTE: 

Up to 4 KB per one packet can be sent. However, total data 

amount from the first block to the final block must be 60 KB or 

less. 

• Mode ............... Fixed as “Y” (indicating the RECEIPT mode) 

• Flag ................. Flag indicating the block No. or the final block flag for the receipt issue 

(1 byte) 

Block No. (0 to 7F) 


Final block flag 

0: Final 

1: Not final 

3-7

3. INTERFACE 

j Command packet in the RECEIPT/TPCL-LE modes (Host → Printer) 



02H xxH xxH xxH Y xxH xxH xxH 




02H xxH xxH 00H xxH xxH Y xxH xxH xxH 






01H to FFH 





NOTE: 

Up to 4 KB per one packet can be sent. However, total data 

amount from the first block to the final block must be 60 KB or 

less. 

• Mode ............... Fixed as “Y” (indicating the RECEIPT mode) 

• Flag ................. Flag indicating the block No. or the final block flag for the receipt issue 

(1 byte) 


Final block flag 0: Final 

1: Not final 


* For the Status Request Command, the Mode Select Command, and Reset Command, one 

packet should include only one command. 

k Turnaround time 

The printer should send a NAK/ACK/status packet after 10 ms from when a PAD/command 

packet has been received. 

3-8

3. INTERFACE 

3.2.4 HOW TO SEND THE DATA PRINT COMMAND WHICH CANNOT BE INCLUDED IN ONE 

PACKET IN THE LABEL MODE 

When the Data Print Command in the LABEL mode cannot be included in one packet (256 bytes 

or more in 1-byte length designation, 4096 bytes or more in 2-byte length designation), it can be 

included in several packets by using the multiple packet format for the Data Print Command, 

described on page 3-7. 

Conditions: Data length for the Bit Map Font Field Command, the Outline Font Field Command, 

and the Bar Code/Two-dimensional Code Format Command, should be fixed as “00”. 

For the JIS 8 and Shift JIS Kanji codes only. 

(Example) 

To include the Data Print Command below into several packets: 

X [01H] [01H] [01] 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] 








Command packet 1 

[STX] [00H] [00H] [DEH] Y [80H] X [01H] [01H] [01H] 





[CRC] [CRC] 

Command packet 2 

[STX] [00H] [00H] [DAH] Y [01H] 





[CRC] [CRC] 

3-9

3. INTERFACE 

3.2.5 CONNECTION SEQUENCE EXAMPLE (FOR LABEL MODE) 

< Normal transmission > 

• When one packet is sent 

Host 

Printer 

PAD 

Detection of the link request 

Ensuring link 

NAK 

Within 40 msec. 

Command packet 

Normal reception 

ACK 

Start of command process 

EOT 

End of data storage or an issue 

ACK 

ACK transmission for the command process end 

• When several packets are sent (for storing a form or graphics, or printing data) 

Host 

Printer 

PAD 


Ensuring link 

NAK 




ACK 



ACK 


ACK 

EOT 

End of data storage or an issue 

ACK 

ACK transmission for the command process end 

3-10

3. INTERFACE 

• When the Status Request Command is sent 

Host 

Printer 

PAD 


Ensuring link 

NAK 


Status request command packet 


Status packet 

Status transmission 

EOT 

• When the host is started up, the host should send the Status Request Command to acquire the 

printer ID. 

• When the printer ID in the command packet is set to “0”, this command is acceptable for all 

printers. 

• The IrDA interface cannot be used while the RS-232 cable is connected. 

• When the Mode Select Command is sent 

Host 

Printer 

PAD 


Ensuring link 

NAK 


Mode select command packet 


ACK 

Start of mode selection process 

EOT 

End of mode selection process 

ACK 

ACK transmission for process end 

• When an EOT or other command data is not sent, after the mode select command packet is sent, 

the printer sends an ACK within 1 second after the mode select process is completed. 

3-11

3. INTERFACE 

< Error transmission > 

• When an error occurs during communication 

Host 

Printer 

Time out 

PAD/Command packet 

NAK/ACK/Status packet 

When a command packet or an EOT cannot 

be received within 1 sec. after a NAK, an 

ACK, or a status packet is sent, the link is 

terminated. However, when a CRC error, a 

framing error, or an overrun error occurs 

within 1 sec., the timer is reset. 


NAK 

CRC error 

When a CRC error occurs in the received 

command, the printer sends a NAK after the 

command packet is received. 

EOT/Command packet 

NAK 

Framing error, overrun error 

When the reception of an EOT or a command 

packet results in a framing error or an overrun 

error, a NAK is sent at that time. 

• When the communication is made during an error state 

Host 

Printer 

PAD 


Ensuring link 

NAK 



EOT 

Status packet 

If the printer is in an error state, it returns 

a status packet, and not an ACK. 

Error is cleared. 

The command is not processed. 

3-12

3. INTERFACE 

• When the Status Request Command is sent during an error state 

Host 

Printer 

PAD 


Ensuring link 

Status request command packet 

EOT 

NAK 

Status packet 


In spite of a normal or error state, the printer 

returns a status packet when receiving the Status 

Request Command. 

Error is cleared. 

• When an error occurs while the command is being processed. 

Host 

Printer 

PAD 


Ensuring link 

NAK 




ACK 


EOT 

An error occurs. 

The process ends abnormally. 

Therefore, an ACK is not sent. 

Time out 

Host: 

Printer: 

Time out due to waiting for a NAK after a PAD is sent...............50 msec. 

(After time out, a PAD should be sent repeatedly.) 

Time out due to waiting for an ACK after a command is sent ....200 msec. 

NOTE: The process time for issuing a label or storing data into flash ROM varies 

according to the contents to be processed. Therefore, time out waiting for an 

ACK is not set. 

Time out due to waiting for a command after a NAK is sent .......................... 1 sec. 

Time out due to waiting for an EOT or a command after an ACK is sent ...... 1 sec. 

Time out due to waiting for an EOT after the status is sent ........................... 1 sec. 

3-13

3. INTERFACE 

3.2.6 CONNECTION SEQUENCE EXAMPLE (FOR RECEIPT/TPCL-LE MODES) 

The transmission control is basically the same as for the LABEL mode. Below is an example of 

the setting method for the flag of each command packet. 

Host 

Printer 

PAD 


Ensuring link 

NAK 


STX 

ID 

ID 

Length 

Y 

80H Command & Data CRC CRC 

Receipt command packet 

ACK 

STX 

ID 

ID 

Length 

Y 


Receipt command packet 

ACK 

STX 

ID 

ID 

Length 

Y 


ACK 


EOT 

ACK 

End of command process 

ACK transmission for command 

process end 

* Flag description: 

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 


Final block flag 

0: Final 

1: Not final 

* After each packet is checked by CRC, the packets which pass the check are stored. When the 

final block is received normally, an issue is started. 

* 128 block Nos. can be set from 0 to 7F. (However, if the packet length is designated in 2 bytes, 

total data amount of all blocks must be 60 KB or less. Therefore, a maximum of 128 block Nos. 

may not be able to be set.) When 128 block Nos. (or 60 KB) are not enough, terminate the 

command transmission, and issue the receipt. After issuing the receipt, the remainder can be 

sent. If the next command packet is sent during an issue, it is discarded without being 

processed. 

* The block Nos. must be consecutive, starting from 0 (in ascending order). If the block Nos. are 

not consecutive, starting from 0 in ascending order, a command syntax error occurs. If the 

same block No. is received again before the final block is received, the block is discarded 

without being stored. 

* For the final block, the most significant bit must be cleared to 0. The printer starts an issue after 

the final block is received. Therefore, if this setting is not made, the printer does not start 

printing. 

3-14

3. INTERFACE 

3.2.7 PRINTER STATE TRANSITION (FOR LABEL MODE) 

Printer state transition 

Event 

State 

Wait state for 

the link 

S1 

Wait state for a 

command after 

the NAK 

transmission 

S2 

Ensuring link 

NAK 

transmission 

→ S2 

Issue 

Command 

reception 

Store 

Command 

reception 

— Normal 

ACK 

transmission 

Command 

analysis 

→ S3 

Error 

Status 

transmission 

End of issue 

End of storage 

Status Request 

Command EOT reception Time out CRC error 

reception 

Syntax error, 

Storage error, 

Error during 

issuing 

— — — — — — — 

— Normal 

Status 

transmission 

→ S3 

— Error 

Status 

transmission 

End of link 

NAK 

transmission 


command/EOT 

after the ACK 

transmission 

S3 


an EOT after 

the status 

transmission 

S4 

→ S4 

— ACK 

transmission 

Command 

analysis 

— Status 

transmission 

EOT has been Status 

received transmission 

ACK 

transmission 

(NOTE 1) 

→ S1 

EOT has not 

been received 

→ S3 → S3 → S3 

→ S4 

— Status 

transmission 

→ S4 → S1 → S1 → S2 → S1 

→ S4 

Store 

Command 

Start of storage 

process 

→ S3 

End of link NAK 

(NOTE 2) transmission 

Issue 

Command 

ACK 

transmission if 

the issue is 

completed. 

(NOTE 1) 

→ S1 

If the issue is 

not completed 

→ S3 


Command 

→ S1 → S1 → S2 → S1 

Clear of error End of link 

— 

→ S1 

→ S1 

→ S1 

NOTES: 1. Only when the ACK transmission for the process end is specified by the Data Print 

Command, an ACK is sent after an issue is completed. 

2. An ACK for the command process end is also sent, when the time out occurs during the 

wait state for an EOT. 

Host state transition 

State 

Event 


NAK for the link 

request 

S1 


an ACK/status 

after the 

command 

transmission 

S2 


an ACK after 

the EOT 

transmission 

S3 

Key entry mode 

NAK reception 

Command 

transmission 

ACK reception 

Status 

reception 

Time out 

(NOTE 1) 

CRC error 

Framing error 

Overrun error 

→ S2 → S1 → S1 → S1 → S1 

Command 

retransmission 

→ S2 

— 

Middle block 

Command 

transmission 

→ S2 

Final block 

EOT 

transmission 

→ S3 

or 

→ S4 

EOT 

transmission 

→ S4 → S4 → S4 

→ S4 → S4 → S4 → S4 

— — 

Activation of 

transmission to 

the printer 

— 

— 

— 

S4 → S4 → S4 → S4 

→ S1 

NOTE: 

The retry count is optionally determined by the host. 

3-15

3. INTERFACE 

3.2.8 PRINTER STATE TRANSITION (FOR RECEIPT/TPCL-LE MODES) 

Printer state transition 

State 


the link 

S1 


packet after the 

NAK 

transmission 

S2 

Event 

Ensuring link 

NAK 

transmission 

→ S2 

Reception of 

the middle 

block packet 

— Normal 

ACK 

transmission 

Reception of 

the final block 

packet 

End of issue 

Status 

Request 

Command 

reception 

EOT 

reception 

Time out 

CRC error 

Framing error 

Overrun error 

Syntax error 

Error during 

issuing 

— — — — — — — — — 

→ S3 

Error 

Status 

transmission 

Normal 

ACK 

transmission 

Command 

analysis 

→ S3 

Error 

Status 

transmission 

— Normal 

Status 

transmission 

→ S3 

— Error 

Status 

transmission 

End of link 

NAK 

transmission 

NAK 

transmission 


packet/EOT 

after the ACK 

transmission 

S3 

→ S4 

— ACK 

transmission 

→ S4 

ACK 

transmission 

Command 

analysis 

EOT has 

been 

received. 

ACK 

transmission 

→ S1 

EOT has not 

been received 

→ S4 → S1 → S1 → S2 → S2 → S1 

Status 

transmission 

Normal 

command 

ACK 

transmission 

if the issue is 

completed. 

→ S1 

If the issue is 

not completed 

→ S3 

Status 

request 

End of link NAK 

(NOTE 1) transmission 

NAK 

transmission 


an EOT after 

the status 

transmission 

S4 

→ S3 

— Status 

transmission 

→ S4 

→ S3 

Status 

transmission 

→ S4 

→ S3 → S3 

— Status 

transmission 

→ S4 

→ S1 → S1 → S2 → S2 → S1 

Clear of error End of link 

— Timer reset 

→ S1 → S1 

→ S4 → S1 

NOTE: 

An ACK for the command process end is also sent, when the time out occurs during the wait 

state for an EOT. 

Host state transition 

Event 

State 


NAK of the link 

request 

S1 


an ACK/status 

after the 

command 

transmission 

S2 


an ACK after 

the EOT 

transmission 

S3 

Key entry mode 

NAK reception 

Command 

transmission 

ACK reception 

Status 

reception 

Time out 

(NOTE 1) 

CRC error 

Framing error 

Overrun error 

→ S2 → S1 → S1 → S1 → S1 

Packet 

retransmission 

→ S2 

— 

Middle block 

Packet 

transmission 

→ S2 

Final block 

EOT 

transmission 

→ S3 

or 

→ S4 

EOT 

transmission 

→ S4 → S4 → S4 

→ S3 → S4 → S4 → S4 

— — 

Activation of 

transmission to 

the printer 

— 

— 

— 

S4 → S4 → S4 → S4 

→ S1 

NOTE: 

The retry count is optionally determined by the host. 

3-16

3. INTERFACE 

3.3 IrDA (IrCOMM) INTERFACE 

The protocol for IrComm specifications is provided. 

Application layer 

IrComm 

Tiny TP 

IrLMP 

IrLAP 

IrDA-SIR 

IrDA V1.2 (Low Power) standard 

parts are required. 

Item 


Communication mode Physical layer conforming to IrDA-SIR V1.2 (Low 

Power) standard 

Transfer speed 9600, 19200, 38400, 115200 bps *1 

Communication distance within 0.1 m *2 

Peak wave length of 850 to 900 nm 

emitted light 

Communication angle within ±15° 

Ambient illuminance 1000 lx or less 

(fluorescent lamp and incandescent lamp) 

Emissive power Min 3.6 mW/Sr (θh, θv ≤ ±15°) 

Min. photo sensibility Min 9 µW/cm 2 (θh, θv ≤ ±15°) 

*1: Values are dependent on the communication protocol settings. 

*2: The communication distance may become shorter than 0.1 m, depending on the host’s 

performance. 

Device nickname: 


Service name (Class name): IrDA: IrCOMM 

Min. turnaround time: 

1 msec 

Link termination threshold time: 12 sec 

3-17

3. INTERFACE 

3.4 RS-232C INTERFACE 

Item 


Normal mode 

Communication mode Start-stop synchronization mode 

Communication direction Transmission/reception (Full duplex) 

Transmission rate 9600, 19200, 38400, 115200 bps *1 

Start bit 

1 bit 

Stop bit 

1 bit 

Data length 

8 bits 

Parity 

None/Even (depending on the setting) 

Error detection *2 

Overrun error 

Framing error 

Parity error 

Received buffer 

64 KB 

*1: Values are dependent on the communication protocol settings. 

*2: Error detection is available only for the RECEIPT mode. 

3.4.1 TRANSMISSION CONTROL (XON/XOFF PROTOCOL) 

• The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) to the host, when the blank positions in the receive 

buffer become 800 bytes or less. 

• The printer sends an XON code (11H) to the host, when the blank positions in the receive buffer 

become 2K bytes or more. 

• When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards the received data 

which exceeds the receive buffer capacity without storing it in the buffer, and the buffer full error 

occurs. (After detecting the XOFF code, the host must stop transmission before the printer 

receive buffer becomes full.) 

3-18

3. INTERFACE 

3.4.2 NOTES WHEN SENDING A COMMAND 

• In the LABEL mode, when any of the commands below are sent, the host should send the next 

command after receiving the process end status. If the host sends the next command before 

receiving the process end status, the printer may discard it without receiving. 

• Print Density Fine Adjust Command (If it is not stored in the form) 

• Print Position Fine Adjust Command (If it is not stored in the form) 

• Form Store Terminate Command 

• Graphic Data Store Command 

• Printer ID Set Command 

• Flash Memory Storage Area Format Command 

• Writable Character Data Store Command 

• Status Request Command 

• Mode Select Command 

• Strip Sensor Adjust Command 

• Data Print Command 

* When automatic status transmission is not specified by the Data Print Command, the 

issue end status is not sent. Therefore, check the printer status by transmitting the 

Status Request Command. When the printer status is idling, the next command should 

be sent. 

• In the TPCL-LE mode, when the automatic status response is selected, the host sends a 

response when receiving an error, print end, and feed end status. 

• In the RECEIPT mode, the host sends a status when receiving an error status, though there is 

no automatic status response selection. To the print end and feed end statuses, the host does 

not return any status. 

3-19

3. INTERFACE 

• Contents of the status 


Data to be sent (Fixed as 5 bytes) 

STX Printer ID Printer status Battery status 

02H xxH xxH xxH xxH 


• Printer status ... Printer status is indicated in 1-byte data. 













0CH: Communication error (Parity, overrun, framing errors) 

(only for RECEIPT mode) 

0DH: Normal end + Label end (See NOTE.) 


10H: Normal end 

NOTE: In the LABEL mode, this is a state when the printer runs out of 

labels, after the effective print length is printed. In the RECEIPT 

mode, this status is returned to the host, when the printer runs out 

of labels, after a receipt is issued. 

• Battery status .. The battery charge status is indicated in 5 levels. 


02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V 


03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V 


04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V 




* The remaining number of printable labels may vary according to the 

contents to be printed and the ambient environment. 

3-20

3. INTERFACE 



SOH STX Status Remaining No. of labels ETX EOT CR LF 

01H 02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH 

• Status .............. Detailed status indicated in 2-byte data 












“40”: Normal issue end 

“41”: Normal feed end 




• Status type ...... Indicated in 1-byte data 

“1”: Status Request Command 

“2”: Automatic status transmission 

• Remaining No. of labels .... Indicated in 4-byte data 

“0000” to “9999” 

3-21

3. INTERFACE 

(1) Connector pin diagram and signal description 

Pin No. Signal name Function Signal direction 

1 

2 

SG 

Ground line for all data and control signals. 

(without the noise filter) 

3 RXD Line for data which the host sends to the printer. 

Logic “1” is a “Low” level, while logic “0” is a “High” 

level. 

It is in a “Low (Mark)” state when no transmission is in 

progress. 

In power save mode, it should be in a “Low (Mark)” 

state. If it is in a “High” state, the printer cannot be 

returned to the normal state from the power save 

mode by opening/closing the cover, or pressing the 

[POWER] switch or the [FEED] switch. 

4 TXD Line for data which the printer sends to the host. 

Logic “1” is a “Low” level, while logic “0” is a “High” 

level. It is in a “Low (Mark)” state when no 

transmission is in progress. It is in a high impedance 

state in power save mode. 

– 

← Host 

Printer → 

5 CTS N/A – 

6 RTS N/A – 

7 TEST The signal is connected with SG. – 

8 N.C – 

(2) Wire connection diagram 

[Host] 

[Printer] 

GND 5 1 SG 

RXD 2 2 SG 

TXD 3 3 RXD 

CTS 8 4 TXD 

RTS 7 5 CTS 

DCD 1 6 RTS 

DTR 4 7 TEST 

DSR 6 8 +5V 

RI 9 

3-22

3. INTERFACE 

(3) Interface circuit 

• Input circuit 

RXD 

TTL/CMOS 

LOGIC LEVEL 

RS-232C LEVEL 

• Output circuit 

TXD 

TTL/CMOS 

LOGIC LEVEL 

RS-232C LEVEL 

Signal levels 

Input voltage 

Output voltage 

H .... +2.4 V to +25 V 

L..... -25 V to -0.6 V 

H .... Min. +5.0 V Typ +5.4 V 

L..... Min. -5.0 V Typ -5.4 V 

(4) Connector used for the communication cable 

• For the printer 

Manufacturer: HOSHIDEN 

Model name: TCP8580 or equivalent 

• For the host 

Manufacturer: DDK 

Model name: 17JE-13090-02-D8C or equivalent 

3-23

3. INTERFACE 

3.5 Bluetooth INTERFACE 

3.5.1 OUTLINED SPECIFICATIONS 

Item 

Specification 

Communication method Bluetooth V1.1 (with logo certification) 

Supported profile 

Serial port profile 

Communication class Class 2 

Communication distance 3 m/360° 

Service name 

ZV-AT 

Device nickname 

TOSHIBA TEC BT 

Flow control 

Credit based flow control 

Operation mode 

Slave mode 

PIN code 

Not used 

Receive buffer 

2 Kbytes 

Link break time out 20 sec. 

Inquiry control 

No response to an inquiry can be made 1 minute after the 

power is turned ON. 

SR mode at page/inquiry 

scanning 

R1 scan interval 1.28 sec. 

Scan window 22.5 msec. (*1) 

(*1) Applicable from the production of January 2004. For the production of December 2003 or 

before, it is 11.25 msec. 

3.5.2 Bluetooth DEVICE ADDRESS (BD address) 

As long as the Bluetooth interface has been installed on the printer, when the printer is turned 

ON, the printer prints the Bluetooth device address. 

[Character] 

The BD address is printed on the self-test result in the system mode. 

[Bar code] 

The bar code indicating BD address is printed by holding down the [POWER] switch for 

approximately 5 seconds, when the printer is turned ON. 

3-24

3. INTERFACE 

3.6 WIRELESS LAN INTERFACE 

3.6.1 OUTLINED SPECIFICATIONS 

Item 

Communication method 

Supported profile 

Transmission rate 

Communication distance 

Client protocol 

Security protocol 

Flow control 

Antenna 

Parameter setting 

Specification 

IEEE802.11b 

Socket communication/LPR 

11/5.5/2/1M bps 

100 m/360° (depending on operating environment) 

DHCP, WINS 

WEP (40 bits, 104 bits), MD5/EAP 

TCP/IP flow control 

Built-in 

Via HTTP or via UART 

3.6.2 MAC ADDRESS 

When the wireless LAN module has been installed on the printer, the printer prints the MAC 

address and wireless LAN module’s parameter settings. 

[MAC address] 

The MAC address is printed on the self-test result in the system mode. 

[Parameter settings] 

The parameter settings are printed by holding down the [POWER] switch for 

approximately 5 seconds, when the printer is turned ON. 

3-25

4. TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE 



This section describes details of the transmission sequence between the host and the printer. 

4-1


4.2 TPCL-LE MODE 

4.2.1 INITIAL SETTING 

Writable characters, logo, and PC interface commands must be stored, before the label issue 

operation. 

(1) Storing writable characters and logos 

Power ON 

No 

 

(Add/change) 

Yes 

Format Command 

[ESC] J1: 

Formats flash memory. 

Bit Map Writable 

Character Command 

[ESC] XD: Stores writable characters or a 

logo on flash memory. 

No 

Completion of storing 

all characters 

Yes 

• Storing PC interface commands 

• Label issue operation 

NOTES: (1) The storage of writable characters or logos is only performed if it is required. 

(2) When the Format Command is not sent before storing a writable character or a 

logo with the same number as the already stored writable character or logo, 

memory will be used with each storing. 

4-2


(2) Storing PC interface commands 

Power ON 

Mode Select Command [ESC] M: Changes the print mode. 

(Add/change) 

No 

 

Yes 

Format Command 

[ESC] J1: Formats flash memory. 

Save Start Command 

[ESC] XO: Declares the start of saving PC interface 

commands. 

Label Size Set Command 

[ESC] D: 

Sets the label size. 

Position Fine Adjust Command 

[ESC] AX: Adjusts the print position. 

Print Density Fine Adjust 

Command 

[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density. 

Image Buffer Clear Command 

[ESC] C: 

Clears the image buffer. 

Line Format Command 

Bit Map Font Format Command 

Outline Font Format Command 

Bar code/2-D Code Format Command 

Bit Map Font Data Command 

Save Terminate Command 

[ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it. 

[ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format. 

[ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format. 

[ESC] XB: Sets the bar code/2-D code format. 

[ESC] RC: Draws data of the bit map font. 

[ESC] XP: Declares the termination of saving PC 

interface commands. 

No 

Completion of 

all storing 

Yes 

z Storing writable characters or logos 

z Label issue operation 

NOTES: 

(1) The storage of PC commands is only performed if it is required. 

(2) When the Format Command is not sent before storing the PC interface command 

with the same number as the already stored PC command, memory will be used 

with each storing. 

(3) Select commands to be stored as the occasion arises. 

4-3


4.2.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION 

An example of the label issue operation is described below. 

(1) Where the Saved Data Call Command is not used: 

Power ON 

Mode Select Command [ESC] M: Changes the print mode. 

Place paper 


[ESC] D: 



Print Density Fine 

Adjust Command 

[ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed length. 


Feed Command 

[ESC] T: 

Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it 

with the first print position. 

Image Buffer Clear Command 

[ESC] C: 

Clears the image buffer. 


Bit Map Font Format Command 

Outline Font Format Command 

Bar Code/2-D Code Format Command 

[ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it. 





Outline Font Data Command 

Bar Code/2-D Code Data Command 

Issue Command 

[ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data. 

[ESC] RV: Draws outline font data. 

[ESC] RB: Draws bar code/2-D code data. 

[ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label. 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

 

No 

 

No 

 

No 

Power OFF 

NOTES: 

(1) The Label Size Set Command must be sent. 

(2) After the power is turned off then on, the Bit Map Font Format Command, the 

Outline Font Format Command, and the Bar Code/Two-dimensional Code Format 

Command should be sent as the occasion arises, because they are not protected 

in memory. 

4-4


(2) Where the Saved Data Call Command is used: 

Power ON 

Place paper 

Saved Data Call Command 

[ESC] XQ: Calls the label format stored in flash 

memory. 

Feed Command [ESC] T: Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it with 

the first print position. 


Outline Font Data Command 

[ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data. 

[ESC] RV: Draws outline font data. 

Bar Code/2-D Code Data Command 

[ESC] RB: Draws bar code/2-D code data. 

Issue Command 

[ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label. 

Yes 

Yes 

 

No 

 

No 

Power OFF 

4-5


4.3 LABEL MODE 


Start 

No 

Mode Select Command 

< Completion of mode selection > 

Yes 

Status Request Command 

Form Store Start Command 

[ESC] M: 

Changes the mode to the LABEL mode as 

required. 

Check to see if the mode has been changed by the 

status request. 

[ESC] FM: Checks the printer state by the status 

request. 

[ESC] XO: Declares the start of form storage. 


[ESC] D: 


Print Density Fine Adjust Command 

Print Position Fine Adjust Command 

Outline Font Field Command 

Bit Map Font Field Command 

Bar Code/2-D Code Format Command 


[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density as required. 

[ESC] AX: Adjusts the print position as required. 




[ESC] LC: Sets the line format. 

Graphic Field Command 

[ESC] N: 

Sets the graphic field format. 

Form Store Terminate Command 

No 

< Completion of form storage > 

Yes 

No 

< Completion of all form storage > 

Yes 

Graphic Data Store Command 

No 

< Completion of storing graphic data > 

Yes 

Writable Character Data Store Command 

[ESC] XP: Declares the termination of form storage. 

Check to see if the form storage has been completed 

by the status request. 

[ESC] SG: Stores the graphic data. 

Check to see if storage of the graphic data has been 

completed by the status request. 

[ESC] XD: Stores the writable character data. 

No 

< Completion of storing writable characters > 

Yes 

Check to see if storage of the writable character data 

has been completed by the status request. 

End 

NOTES: (1) Previously assign the form to be stored to each form No., and store it. Store 

writable character data and graphic data as required. 

(2) When a command such as the above is sent, be sure to confirm that the process 

is completed, before the next command is sent. 

4-6


4.3.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION 

Host 

Start 

Printer 

Start 

Data Print Command 

RS-232C 

Data is sent/received 

through the RS-232C. 

NG 

Batch 

< Data is checked. > 

OK 

< Batch/Strip issue > 

Strip 

Printing 

Printing 

No 

< Normal end > 

Yes 

The status of 

issue end is sent. 

The status of 

issue end is sent. 

To the next command 

No 

Is the [FEED] 

switch pressed? 

Yes 

< Completion > Yes 

No 

Press the 

[FEED] switch. 

Printing 

Printing 

NOTES: (1) In the batch issue mode, the printer issues the designated number of labels. If the 

labels are short because one failed to attach, issue labels again by pressing the 

[FEED] switch. 

(2) In the strip issue mode, the printer issues only one label in spite of the 

designation. Issue the required number of labels by pressing the [FEED] switch. 

4-7


4.4 RECEIPT MODE 


Start 


[ESC] M: Changes the mode to the LABEL mode. 

No 


Yes 

Writable Character Data Store Command 

[ESC] XD: Stores the writable character data. 

No 

< Completion of storing > 

Yes 

Graphic Data Store Command 

[ESC] SG: Stores the graphic data. 

No 


Yes 



No 


Yes 


[ESC] M: Changes the mode to the RECEIPT mode. 

No 


Yes 

End 

NOTES: 

(1) To store the writable character data and the print tone fine adjustment value, the 

mode should be changed to the LABEL mode. After storing is finished, the mode 

should be returned to the RECEIPT mode. 

(2) When a command such as the above is sent, be sure to confirm that the process 

is completed, before the next command is sent. 

4-8


4.4.2 RECEIPT ISSUE OPERATION 

Host 

Start 

Printer 

Start 

Command & Data 

for a receipt issue 

RS-232C 

Data is received. 

Printing 



No 


Yes 

A status is sent. 

Command & Data 

for a receipt issue 


Printing 



No 


Yes 

A status is sent. 

NOTES: 

(1) In the RECEIPT mode, the status of issue end is not 

automatically sent. Before the next receipt is issued, 

whether or not the sent data is issued normally should 

be confirmed by sending the Status Request Command. 

When a receipt is not issued due to an error, the data 

should be sent again. 

(2) In the RECEIPT mode, when the [FEED] switch is 

pressed, a 20-mm feed is performed. 

(3) In the RECEIPT mode, the issue count cannot be set. If 

the batch/strip issue mode is set, it does not become 

effective. 

No 

Is the [FEED] 

switch pressed? 

Yes 

20-mm feed 

4-9

5. TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS) 



This chapter describes details regarding the interface commands for the TPCL-LE mode (including 

TPCL-LE1 mode) of the print mode. There are two issue types, “Batch issue” and “Strip issue”. In 

batch issues, a backfeed is performed before printing, regardless of the selected sensor type. In strip 

issues, a backfeed is not performed. 

NOTE: 

With the firmware V1.3 or greater, a back feed is not performed even in batch issue mode if there is no 

print data to be printed within 2.1 mm from the top of the print area. 

[Command List] 

Format 

Command 

Automatic ACK/Status Response 

(conditionally) 

[ESC]D Label Size Set Command No 

[ESC]ID Printer ID Set Command Yes 

[ESC]M 


No, when the mode is changed to 

TPCL-LE. 

[ESC]AX Position Fine Adjust Command Yes 

[ESC]AY Print Density Fine Adjust Command Yes 

[ESC]AH Strip Sensor Threshold Value Set Command Yes 

[ESC]C Image Buffer Clear Command No 

[ESC]XR Clear Area Command No 

[ESC]LC Line Format Command No 

[ESC]PC Bit Map Font Format Command No 

[ESC]PV Outline Font Format Command No 

[ESC]XB Bar Code Format Command No 

[ESC]RC Bit Map Font Data Command No 

[ESC]RV Outline Font Data Command No 

[ESC]RB Bar Code/Two-Dimensional Code Data Command No 

[ESC]XS Issue Command Yes 

[ESC]T Feed Command Yes 

[ESC]J1 Flash Memory Format Command Yes 

[ESC]XD Bit Map Writable Character Command Yes 

[ESC]SG Graphic Command No 

[ESC]XO Save Start Command No 

[ESC]XP Save Terminate Command Depends on the setting of [ESC]X0. 

[ESC]XQ Saved Data Call Command No 

[ESC]HD Head Broken Dots Check Command Yes 

[ESC]WR 

Reset Command 

Yes, only when the interface is IrDA 

ESC]WS 

[ESC]FM 

(TEC Protocol) or RS-232C. 

Status Request Command --- 

[ESC]v 

[ESC]WX Mode Information Acquire Command --- 

[ESC]WV Version Information Acquire Command --- 

[ESC]IT Device Address Acquire Command --- 

5-1


5.2 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS 

5.2.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND 

ESC Command & Data LF NUL 

z The length from [ESC] to [LF] [NUL] must be as specified by each command. 

z There are the following three kinds of control codes: 

c ESC (1BH), LF (0AH), NUL (00H) 

d { (7BH), | (7CH), } (7DH) 

5.2.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE 

Function 

Format 

Describes the outline of the function of the command. 

Shows the format of the command. 

The format designation method should conform to the following rules: 

z Each set of small letters (such as aa, bbbb) indicates a parameter item. 

z An item enclosed in parentheses may be omitted. 

z “---” indicates the repetition of an item. 

z Brackets and parentheses are used only in coding, and must not be transmitted 

in practice. 

z Other symbols must always be inserted at designated positions before being 

transmitted. 

Term 

Explains the term(s) used in the format. 

* “0 to 999” described in the entry range indicates that up to 3-digit variable-length 

entry is allowed. (Entry of “001” or “009” is also possible.) “000 to 999” indicates 

that the entry must be fixed as 3 digits. 

Explanation 

Note 

Refer to 

Examples 

Explains the command in detail. 

Supplementary explanation of the command. 

Related commands 

Explains the command examples. 

[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL] 

The above corresponds to the transfer of the following: 

1B 54 32 30 43 33 30 0A 00 

[ESC] T 2 0 C 3 0 [LF] [NUL] 

5.2.3 PRECAUTIONS 

The commands and parameters described in this specification must always be used. If any 

command or parameter other than those covered in this specification are used, the printer’s 

operation will not be guaranteed. 

5-2


5.3 COMMANDS RELATED TO SETTING 

5.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND [ESC] D 

Function 

Format 

Sets the size of a label or tag. 

[ESC] Daaaa, bbbb, cccc (, dddd) [LF] [NUL] 

Term aaaa: Pitch length of the label or tag 

4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units) 

4 digits: 0100 (10.0 mm) to 5070 (507.0 mm) 

5 digits: 00100 (10.0 mm) to 05070 (507.0 mm) 

bbbb: 

cccc: 

dddd: 

Effective print width 

Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units) 

0480 (48.0 mm) 

Effective print length 

4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units) 

4 digits: 0070 (7.0 mm) to 5000 (500.0 mm) 

5 digits: 00070 (7.0 mm) to 05000 (500.0 mm) 

Reserved area (Omissible) 


Explanation 

(1) Pitch length of labels or tags 

If any value out of the above range is specified, it should be corrected. When a 

smaller value than 10.0 mm is specified, it should be changed to 10.0 mm. When a 

larger value than 507.0 mm is specified, it should be changed to 507.0 mm. 

(2) Effective print width 

It should be fixed as 48.0 mm. If any value other than 48.0 mm is specified, it is 

changed to 48.0 mm. 

(3) Effective print length 

If any value out of the above range is specified, it should be corrected. When a 

smaller value than 7.0 mm is specified, it should be changed to 7.0 mm. When a 

larger value than 500.0 mm is specified, it should be changed to 500.0 mm. 

(4) Reserved area (Omissible) 

The reserved parameter is not checked. 

5-3


0 X 

Paper feed direction 

0 X 


Y 

Y 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 


Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 


4.5 mm 3.0 mm 

4.5 mm 3.0 mm 

Effective 

print length 

Label 

pitch 

Effective 

print length 

Label 

pitch 

Backing paper 

Label 

Black mark 

(Printed on the 

back of receipt) 

[Label] 

[Receipt with black marks] 

Notes (1) When the label size or type of sensor is changed, the Label Size Set Command 

must first be transmitted. 

(2) The label pitch length is protected in memory (even if the power is turned off). 

(3) After sending the Label Size Set Command, one sheet of paper must be fed by the 

[FEED] switch or the Feed Command ([ESC] T), to align the paper with the first 

print position prior to printing. 

(4) The origin of drawing coordinates and the print stop position (head position at stop) 

are determined according to the parameters of the Label Size Set Command. 

(5) The origin of drawing coordinates and the print stop position (head position at stop) 

are adjustable by the Fine Adjust Commands. 

(6) Even if a gap or a black mark is detected within less than 90% of the effective print 

length specified by the Label Size Set Command, it is ignored. 

(7) When a gap or a black mark cannot be detected within less than 150% of the label 

pitch length, it is assumed to be a paper jam error. 

Example 

[ESC] D0430, 0480, 0380 [LF] [NUL] 

48.0 mm 

48.0 mm 

3.0 mm 

3.0 mm 

38.0 mm 

38.0 mm 

43.0 mm 43.0 mm 

2.0 mm 

2.0 mm 

5-4


Available media size 

[mm] 

Item Paper Label Receipt 

Issue Batch Strip with black marks without black marks 

Label pitch Min. 10.0 13.0 10.0 – 

Max. 167.0 67.0 507.0 – 

Label length Min. 7.0 10.0 7.0 – 

Max. 160.0 60.0 500.0 – 

Backing paper width Min. 28.0, 31.0, 34.0, 37.0, 40.0, 43.0, – 

Max. 46.0, 49.0, 52.0, 55.0, 58.0 ± 0.5 

Label width Min. 25.0 – 

Max. 55.0 

Paper width Min. – 28.0, 31.0, 34.0, 37.0, 40.0, 43.0, 

Max. – 46.0, 49.0, 52.0, 55.0, 58.0 ± 0.5 

Gap length Min. 3.0 – 

Max. 7.0 – 

Black mark length Min. – 3.0 – 

Max. – 7.0 – 

Margins of backing Min. 1.5 – 

paper Max. 7.0 – 

Effective print width Min. 48.0 

Max. – 

Effective print length Min. 7.0 – 

Max. 160.0 60.0 500.0 – 

Slow up interval 2.25 

Non-printable area Min. 1.0 (*1) (when the gap or black mark length is 5.0 mm) – 

Max. 3.0 (when the gap or black mark length is 3.0 mm) – 

(*1) Print position fine adjustment is necessary. 

5-5


5.3.2 PRINTER ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID 

Function 

Format 

Sets the ID for the printer. 

[ESC] ID ; aa(,b) [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Printer ID (2-byte hex data) 

0000H to FFFFH 

b: Reserved area (Omissible) (* Firmware V1.3 or greater) 

Fixed to 0. 

Explanation 

Notes 

(1) The printer ID is necessary information to identify each printer in RF 

communications 

(1) The set printer ID is backed up in memory (even if the power is turned off). 

(2) The last 5 digits of the printer’s serial number have been set as the printer ID, at the 

time of shipment from the factory. 

(3) In IrDA: TEC Protocol, the printer checks the set ID against the ID in the received 

command packet. If they do not match, the printer discards the command packet. 

However, when the ID in the command packet is “0”, the printer accepts the 

command packet without checking the set IDs. 

Example 

To set “03H 51H” as the ID of the printer: 

[ESC] ID ; [03H] [51H] [LF] [NUL] 

In this case, the printer ID in status printing is “00849”. 

5-6


5.3.3 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M 

Function 

Format 

Changes the print mode. 

[ESC] M; a(,b) [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Print mode designation 

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

Print mode (Bit 0 to Bit 6 * See Table 1.) 

* Table 1 Print mode 

Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM 

0: Not performed 

1: Performed 

HEX Mode How to deal with the received data after an error is cleared 

30H LABEL Discards 

31H RECEIPT Discards 

32H RECEIPT1 Continues printing 


41H TPCL-LE Continues printing 

42H TPCL-LE1 Continues printing (* Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

b: Print position detection feed (Omissible. If omitted, the print position detection feed 

is not performed.) (* Firmware V1.1 or greater) 

0: When the mode change from RECEIPT or RECEIPT1 to LABEL is requested, 

a print position detection feed is not performed after the mode is changed. 


a print position detection feed is performed after the mode is changed. 

Explanation 

(1) There are 3 types of the print mode: “LABEL”, “RECEIPT”, and “TPCL-LE”. 

(2) Both 31H and 33H are used for the “RECEIPT” mode. 33H is provided to maintain 

the compatibility with RECEIPT2 used for the conventional models. On the B- 

SP2D, the RECEIPT mode operation of 33H is the same as the 31H. Therefore, 

both 31H and 33H are defined as “RECEIPT”. 

(3) “Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM” is the function for the specifications 

which do not allow the printer to spontaneously send the status thorough IrDA; 

IrCOMM. This function enables the printer to forcefully send the status to the host, 

if the link between the printer and the host is established. However, if the link 

between the printer and the host is not established upon the status transmission, 

the printer cannot send the status. Therefore, the status is discarded. (In the next 

connection to the host, the printer does not send the status to the host.) 

(4) “Print position detection feed” is a function that automatically feeds the label to the 

print start position after the print mode is changed from RECEIPT or RECEIPT1 to 

LABEL. The sensor is not used when issuing in RECEIPT or RECEIPT 1 mode, 

therefore, after mode is changed to LABEL, the print start position cannot be 

detected. This is useful when using sensor detectable paper in both RECEIPT and 

LABEL modes. 

(5) In the TPCL-LE1 mode, it is possible to re-print the last print data by pressing the 

FEED button. 

5-7


Notes 

(1) The print mode designation (the specified print mode and the automatic status 

response in IrDA: IrCOMM) is backed up in memory (even if the power is turned 

off). 

(2) The factory default is “30H: LABEL mode” and “Automatic status response in IrDA: 

IrCOMM is not performed”. (The IrDA protocol is “TEC Protocol”.) 

(3) When the print mode is changed, the type of sensor is automatically changed. 

LABEL mode (0): 

TPCL-LE mode (A): 

TPCL-LE1 mode (B): 

RECEIPT mode (1 or 3): 

RECEIPT1 mode (2): 

The previously backed up sensor is designated. 



No sensor is designated. 


(4) If the RECEIPT mode is selected or no sensor is designated in the LABEL or 

TPCL-LE mode, an initial feed is not performed when the cover is closed. 

(5) When the mode change is finished, the printer sends the normal end status or an 

ACK to the host. However, when the mode is changed to the TPCL-LE mode, the 

printer does not send the status. In IrDA: IrCOMM, only when bit 7 of the print 

mode designation is set to “1”, the printer sends the status. 

(6) The print mode can be changed by the printer itself. However, since the setting for 

the automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM cannot be changed, the setting 

remains as the same. 

(7) As the print position detection feed parameter is effective only when changing the 

print mode to LABEL, this parameter status will be ignored when changing the 

mode to TPCL-LE. 

(8) The print position detection feed is performed according to the conditions, such as, 

label pitch, fine adjustment, and sensor selection, which were set in the LABEL or 

TPCL-LE mode before the printer is operated in RECEIPT or RECEIPT1 mode. If 

no sensor is selected, the print position detection feed will not be performed. 

(9) After performing a print position detection feed, the printer does not send a process 

end status. If an error occurs during the print position detection feed, the printer 

does not feed after the error is cleared. However, when the error is cleared by 

opening/closing the cover, the print position detection feed is performed. 

(10) When changing the print mode by the printer itself, the print position detection feed 

parameter cannot be set. 

(11) When the mode select command is designated with the print position detection 

feed at the end of a print data issued in RECEIPT1 mode, and if an error occurs 

while printing, the printing will restart after the error is cleared and then, the print 

mode will be changed to the LABEL mode and a print position detection feed is 

performed. 

(12) When the LABEL mode is selected in the mode select command and the print 

position detection feed parameter is set 0 (not performed), and if an error occurs 

while the printer issues in RECEIPT1 mode, the print mode is changed to the 

LABEL mode after the error is cleared. (The mode select command is executed.) 

5-8


Normal mode 

(LED lights up in green or orange) 

Open the cover 

Press the [FEED] switch for 3 seconds 

Press the [FEED] switch 

Mode selection mode 

(LED lights up in red) 

Press the [POWER] switch 

Start from where the setting is currently made 


TPCL-LE mode 

(LED blinks in red once) 

Close the cover 


is canceled. 


LABEL mode 

(LED blinks in red twice) 



RECEIPT mode 

(LED blinks in red 3 times) 



RECEIPT1 mode 




TPCL-LE1 mode 




Save (update) the setting 

5-9


5.4 COMMANDS RELATED TO FINE ADJUSTMENT 

5.4.1 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX 

Function 

Format 

Adjusts the feed value so that the label will be shifted forward or backward from the 

standard print start position. 

[ESC] AX; abbb, cddd, eff [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a fine adjustment is to 

be made. 

+: Backward 

-: Forward 

bbb: 

Feed value to be finely adjusted. 

000 to 150 (in 0.1 mm units) 

c: Reserved area 

ddd: 

Reserved area 

e: Reserved area 

ff: 

Reserved area 

Explanation 

(1) When parameter “a” is set to any value other than “+” or “-“, a command error 

occurs. 

(2) If any value out of the above range is specified for the feed value, it should be 

corrected. If a larger value than 15.0 mm is specified, it should be changed to 15.0 

mm. 

(3) The reserved parameters are not checked. 

(4) When the print position is changed or the gap between the labels is not 3 mm, the 

Print Position Fine Adjust Command should be used as required. (When the gap 

between the labels is 3 mm, the standard print start position is 3 mm from the 

leading edge of the label.) 

5-10


[Print position fine adjustment] (To finely adjust the feed for shifting backward or forward) 

One label 

± 0.0 mm 

Print start position 

(Standard: 3 mm from the leading edge of the label) 

+15.0 mm 


-15.0 mm 



Notes 

(1) The set print position fine adjustment value is protected in memory (even if the 

power is turned off). 

(2) The factory default value is 0.0 mm. 

(3) The fine adjustment values changed by the Position Fine Adjust Command in the 

LABEL mode, are also effective for the TPCL-LE mode. 

5-11


5.4.2 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY 

Function 

Format 

Adjusts the automatically set print density. 

[ESC] AY ; abb, c (, d) [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density 

+: Increase (Darker) 

-: Decrease (Lighter) 

bb: 

Print density fine adjustment value 

00 to 10 (in units of 1 step) 

c: Print mode 

0: Reserved 

1: Direct thermal 

d: Head output division designation (Omissible) 

0: Auto (Divided by 2 or 3) 

1: Divided by 2 (Default) 

2: Divided by 3 

3: Auto1 (Not divided/Divided by 2 or 3) 

Explanation (1) If the print mode is set to any value other than “1”, it should be changed to “1" 

(2) The default value for the head output division designation is “1”. 

(3) The standard density is finely adjusted to increase or decrease. 

(4) When any print density fine adjustment value out of the above range is set, a 

command error will occur. 

(5) The print density may become lower if the print ratio per line is high. When 

“Divided by 3” is designated in the head output division designation, the print 

density may be improved. However, the issue speed when “Divided by 3” is set, 

may be slower than when “Divided by 2” is set. 

(6) When “0: Auto” is designated, “Divided by 3” or “Divided by 2” is automatically 

selected for every line according to the print ratio. The width of half a dot may not 

be printed on the line when switching between “Divided by 2” and “Divided by 3”. 

Therefore, do not designate “0: Auto” when a serial bar code is printed. 

(7) When “3: Auto1” is designated, “Not divided”, “Divided by 3”, or “Divided by 2” is 

automatically selected for every line according to the print ratio. The width of half a 

dot may not be printed on the line when switching between “Not divided”, “Divided 

by 2” and “Divided by 3”. Therefore, do not designate “3: Auto1” when a serial bar 

code is printed. 

(8) When “3: Auto1” is designated, it will be automatically changed to “Divided by 3” if 

the battery level becomes 2, in order to stable the print quality. As a result, the print 

speed will be reduced. 

5-12


Notes 

(1) The set print density fine adjustment value and the head output division 

designation, are protected in memory (even if the power is turned off). 

(2) The fine adjustment values changed by the Print Density Fine Adjust Command in 

the LABEL mode, are also effective for the TPCL-LE mode. 

(3) When the head output division designation is omitted, the backed up value in 

memory is used. 

Examples To set the density to -2. 

[ESC] AY; -02, 1 [LF] [NUL] 

To set the density to +3. 

[ESC] AY; +03, 1 [LF] [NUL] 

5-13


5.4.3 STRIP SENSOR THRESHOLD VALUE SET COMMAND [ESC] AH 

Function 

Format 

Sets the sensor threshold value to switch the mode between strip and batch. 

[ESC] AH; a [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Setting 

0: Default value (3.2 V) 

1: Threshold value 

2: Fixed as the batch mode 

3: Fixed as the strip mode 

4: Reserved 

Explanation (1) If the issue mode is not properly switched when using thin backing paper, “1: 

Threshold value” should be set, as required. 

(2) When “1: Threshold value” is set, this command is sent after the backing paper of 

the label to be used, is positioned on the strip issue path and the cover is closed. 

The printer reads the sensor adjustment value for the backing paper, and then sets 

the threshold value to switch the mode between strip and batch. (When this 

command is sent, the backing paper must be loaded on the strip issue path. If the 

backing paper is loaded on the batch issue path, or the label is loaded, and the 

command is sent, the mode will not be switched properly.) 

Notes 

(1) The set threshold value is backed up and kept until a new value is set using this 

command. When the power is turned on, the backed up value is retrieved and set 

(2) “0: Default value” has been set as the default at the time of shipment from the 

factory. 

(3) This command is used for sensor adjustment. Therefore, it must not be included in 

issue operations. 

(4) When either “2: Fixed as the batch mode” or “3: Fixed as the strip mode” for 

parameter “a”, is selected, the printer operates in the specified mode, without 

automatically switching between the batch and strip modes. 

Particularly when the printer is used without the strip roller module, the strip sensor 

value becomes unstable. Additionally, the stop position for the label becomes 

misaligned, and the issue count is corrected to “1”. Therefore, “2: Fixed as the 

batch mode” or “3: Fixed as the strip mode” for parameter “a” must be specified in 

this command. 

5-14


5.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO CLEAR 

5.5.1 IMAGE BUFFER CLEAR COMMAND [ESC] C 

Function 

Format 

Clears the image buffer for drawing characters, lines, bar codes, and graphics. 

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL] 

Explanation (1) After changing the label size, the image buffer must be cleared. 

(2) The increment/decrement designation is valid until the Image Buffer Clear 

Command is transmitted. 

Examples 

[ESC]D0508,0480,0468[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]T20C51[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]C[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PC000;0080,0065,1,1,A,+00,00,B,J0000,M0,+0000000000,Z00,P1[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PC001;0250,0150,1,1,G,+00,00,B,J0000,M0,+0000000000,Z00,P1[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RC000;ABC[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RC001;DEF[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0001,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

5-15


5.5.2 CLEAR AREA COMMAND [ESC] XR 

Function 

Format 

Clears the designated area or reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated 

area in the drawing area. 

[ESC] XR; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e [LF] [NUL] 

Term aaaa: Designated area start point X-coordinate 


bbbb: 

cccc: 

dddd: 

Designated area start point Y-coordinate 

4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units) 

Designated area end point X-coordinate 


Designated area end point Y-coordinate 


e: How to clear 

A: Clears the contents in the designated area to zeros. 

B: Reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated area. 

Explanation 

Backing paper 

Label 

End point 

Effective 

print length 

Start point 

Effective 

print width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 

Y 


Notes (1) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed. 

(2) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are set to an 

upper right and a lower left points, respectively. 

(3) The start and end point coordinates of the designated area must be set within the 

effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D). 

(4) If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing 

may become poor, or the printer may reset. When “B: Reverses the white/black 

dot pattern in the designated area” is selected for how to clear and the black dot 

pattern is increased, note the print ratio. 

5-16


Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 

Start point of 

designated area 

Effective print area 

10.0 mm 

58.5 mm 

Designated area 

End point of designated area 

24.5 mm 


36.2 mm 

[ESC]XR;0245,0100,0362,0585,A[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0001,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

5-17


5.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO DRAWING FORMAT 

5.6.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] LC 

Function 

Format 

Sets the line format and draws the line. 

[ESC] LC; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, f (, ggg) [LF] [NUL] 

Term aaaa: Start point X-coordinate 


bbbb: 

cccc: 

dddd: 

Start point Y-coordinate 


End point X-coordinate 


End point Y-coordinate 


e: Type of line 

0: Line (horizontal, vertical) 

1: Rectangle 

2: Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “0”.) 





f: No. of line width dots 

1 to 9 (in 0.1 mm units) 

ggg: 



Explanation (1) When the set values for the start point X- and Y- coordinates and the end point X- 

and Y- coordinates are not within the image (frame) buffer, the line is not drawn. 

(2) When the type of line is set to any value other than the range from 0 to 6, a 

command error occurs. 

(3) When the number of line width dots is set to “0”, a command error occurs. 

(4) The reserved parameter is not performed. 

(5) If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing 

may become poor, or the printer may be reset. When a horizontal line is printed, 

note the print ratio. 

5-18


Backing paper 

Label 

Effective 

print length 

End 

point 

Start 

point 

Y 

Effective 

print width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 


[Line] 

(1) Horizontal line (In the case of |Y 2 - Y 1 | = 0) 

(X 1,Y 1) (X 2,Y 2) 

Line width 

(2) Vertical line (In the case of |X 2 - X 1 | = 0) 

(X 1,Y 1) 

(X 2,Y 2) 

Line width 

5-19


[Rectangle] 

(X 1,Y 1) 

(X 2,Y 2) 

Line width 

(X 2,Y 2) (X 1,Y 1) 

Line width 

Line width 

Line width 

Notes 

(1) In line designation, a horizontal line or a vertical line is drawn, according to the 

start and end point coordinates. When the coordinates which make a slanted line 

are specified, a rectangle is drawn. 

(2) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed. 

(3) The start and end point coordinates must be set so that the result of line drawing 

will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command 

([ESC] D). 

Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 


5.0 mm 

28.0 mm 

0.4 mm 

20.0 mm 

0.4 mm 


30.5 mm 


[ESC]LC;0200,0050,0305,0050,0,4[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]LC;0200,0050,0200,0280,0,4[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0001,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

5-20


5.6.2 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PC 

Function 

Format 

Sets the format indicating the position on the label at which the bit map font is to be 

printed and how it is to be printed. 

[ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo) 

(, Zpp) (, Pq) (= rrr ------ rrr) [LF] [NUL] 

Term aaa: Character string number 

000 to 199 (Two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable.) 

bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of character string 


cccc: 

Print origin of Y-coordinate of character string 


d: Character horizontal magnification 

0.5 to 4.0 (in 0.5 magnification units) 

* Two digit designation enables magnifications in 0.5 units. 

(05 ~ 40: 0.5 to 4.0 magnifications) 

d d 

Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 

Designation in magnifications : 0 to 4 

e: Character vertical magnification 

0.5 to 4.0 (in 0.5 magnification units) 

* Two digit designation enables magnifications in 0.5 units. 

(05 ~ 40: 0.5 to 4.0 magnifications) 

e e 

Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 

Designation in magnifications : 0 to 4 

ff: 

Type of font 

A: Times Roman (Medium) 12 point 

B: Times Roman (Medium) 15 point 

C: Times Roman (Bold) 15 point 

D: Times Roman (Bold) 18 point 

E: Times Roman (Bold) 21 point 

F: Times Roman (Italic) 18 point 

G: Helvetica (Medium) 9 point 

H: Helvetica (Medium) 15 point 

I: Helvetica (Medium) 18 point 

J: Helvetica (Bold) 18 point 

K: Helvetica (Bold) 21 point 

L: Helvetica (Italic) 18 point 

M: Presentation (Bold) 27 point 

N: Letter Gothic (Medium) 14.3 point 

O: Prestige Elite (Medium) 10.5 point 

P: Prestige Elite (Bold) 15 point 

Q: Courier (Medium) 15 point 

R: Courier (Bold) 18 point 

S: OCR-A 12 point 

T: OCR-B 12 point 

5-21


U: Writable character 41 (16 × 16 dots) 

W: Writable character 42 (24 × 24 dots) 

a: Standard character (12 × 24 dots) 

b: Bold character (48 × 96 dots) 

d: Price Font 1 (16 × 40 dots) 

e: Price Font 2` (32 × 48 dots) 

o: Gothic725 Black 6 point 

q: Gothic725 Black 6 point 

01 (a): Writable character 1 (1×1 dot to 384×720 dots) 

a: Reserved area (Omissible) 

0 to 2 

* The following fonts are proportional. 

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, o, q 

ghh: 

ii: 

Fine adjustment of character-to-character space 

(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.) 

g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character 

space. 

+: Increase 

-: Decrease 

hh: No. of space dots between characters 

00 to 99 (in dots) 

Rotational angles of a character and character string 

00: 0° (char.) 0° (char.-string) 




j: Character attribution 

B: Black character 

W (aabb): Reverse character 

aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black 

background in the horizontal direction 

aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots) 

bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black 

background in the vertical direction 

bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots) 

F (aabb): Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “B”.) 

aa: 01 to 99 

bb: 01 to 99 

C (aa): Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “B”.) 

aa: 01 to 99 

* Parenthesized descriptions are omissible. If “F” or “C” is specified, it is 

ignored. 

If the parenthesized values for “W: Reverse character” are omitted, the 

characters are reversed. Thus, increasing the larger of the two black 

character magnifications (horizontal or vertical) × 6 dots. 

5-22


Jkkll: 

Mm: 


kk: 00 to 16 

ll: 00 to 16 


m: 0 to 2 

noooooooooo: Increment and decrement (Omissible) 

n: Designates whether to increment or decrement. 

+: Increment 

-: Decrement 

oooooooooo: Skip value 

0000000000 to 9999999999 

* If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed. 

Zpp: 

Pq: 


pp: 00 to 20 

Alignment (Omissible. If omitted, the alignment is set to the left.) 

q: Designates the character position 

1: Left 

2: Center 

3: Right 

4aaaa: Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “1”) 

aaaa: 0050 to 1040 

5aaaabbbcc: Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “1”) 

aaaa: 0050 to 1040 

bbb: 010 to 500 

cc: 01 to 99 

rrr------rrr: 

Data string to be printed (Omissible) 

Max. 100 digits 

5-23


Explanation (1) Character string number 

When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RC), the format designated by the 

character string number is selected. 

(2) Print origin of coordinates 

Backing paper 

Label 

Effective 

print length 

Print origin 

of coordinates 

Y 

Effective print 

width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 


The print origin of coordinates must be set, so that the character drawing result will 

be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D). 

(3) Horizontal magnification and vertical magnification 

Vertical 

magnification 

Horizontal 

magnification 

Horizontal 

magnification 

Vertical 

magnification 

5-24


[Relationship between drawing coordinates and magnification] 

Char. height × 

Vertical 

magnification 

Point of 

origin 

Char. 

height 

Enlarge 

Left offset 

Char. width 

Horizontal spacing/ 

proportional spacing 

Point of 

origin of 

next char. 

Point of 

origin 

Char. Width × 

Horizontal magnification 

(Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing) 

× Horizontal magnification 

Point of 

origin of 

next char. 

(4) Type of font 

A: Times Roman : 

B: Times Roman : 

C: Times Roman : 

D: Times Roman : 

E: Times Roman : 

F: Times Roman : 

G: Helvetica : 

H: Helvetica : 

I: Helvetica : 

J: Helvetica : 

K: Helvetica : 

L: Helvetica : 

M: Presentation : 

N: Letter Gothic : 

O: Prestige Elite : 

P: Prestige Elite : 

Q: Courier : 

R: Courier : 

S: OCR-A : 

T: OCR-B : 

5-25


o, q: Gothic725 Black: 

(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space 

If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots between 

characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal spacing/proportional 

spacing determined for each character. If character-to-character space is specified, 

drawing will take place according to the value obtained by adding the character 

spacing/proportional spacing to the specified value. 

Point of 

origin 

Point of origin of 

next char. 

(Horizontal spacing/proportional 

spacing) × Horizontal magnification 

No. of fine adjust space dots 

between characters 

(6) Rotational angles of a character and character string 

Sample 

Origin 

0° (00) 90° (11) 180° (22) 270° (33) 

(7) Selection of character attribution 

No. of dots in the 

horizontal direction 

A 

B 

A 

B 


vertical direction 

Black characters 

Reverse characters 

If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing may 

become poor, or the printer may be reset. When “B: Reverses the white/black dot 

pattern in the designated area” is selected for how to clear and the black dot pattern is 

increased, note the print ratio. 

5-26


(8) Increment/decrement 

Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is 

issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row 

will not be drawn. 

When the font type is U, V, a, e, or j, the increment or decrement cannot be specified. 

(Even if the increment or decrement is specified, it will be ignored.) Font type “e” is 

applicable only when Chinese () is specified, therefore, it is possible to specify the 

increment/decrement in case of Price Font 2. 

Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999 

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1 

1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999 

2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000 

3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001 

4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002 

5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003 

Letters and numerals for increment/decrement 

For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are 

possible. Only the numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/ 

decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the data. 

Example of increment/decrement calculation 

Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A 

INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3 

1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A 

2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A 

3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A 

4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A 


(9) Alignment 

Designated origin 

Left 

Center 

Right 

(10) Data string to be printed 

Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol 

“=.” Up to 100 digits can be printed. If the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, 

the excess data will be discarded. 

For the character code table, refer to chapter 11 “CHARACTER CODE TABLE”. 


The value range of the reserved parameter is described in this specification. However, if 

values for the reserved parameters are specified, they are not checked. 

5-27


Notes (1) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be 

drawn. If the total bit map font, outline font, and bar code/two-dimensional code 

increment/decrement fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without 

incrementing/decrementing any excess field. The field to be incremented or 

decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer Clear 

Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted. 

[Example] 

1) Format Command (Increment character string No. 001 (+1)) 

2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 002) 


4) Image Buffer Clear Command 

5) Data Command (Character string No. 001 “0001”) 

6) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “AB-”) 


8) Issue Command (2 labels) 

0001 

AB - 0100 

0002 

AB - 0102 

9) Issue Command (1 label) 

0003 

AB - 0104 




00000 

5-28


(2) The Bit Map Font Format Command may be connected to the Outline Font Format 

Command when transmitted. 

[ESC] P C001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] 

C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] 

C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF] 

V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL] 

(3) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the drawing data 

field for the previous label is automatically cleared using the character string 

number. Then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character string 

number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated. Since 

the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C) 

and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same 

character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command 

should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the 

same character string number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command 

is sent.) 

Refer to 

Bit Map Font Data Command ([ESC] RC) 

Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV) 

Bar Code/Two-dimensional Code Format Command ([ESC] XB) 

5-29


Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 

(1) 

12.5 

mm 

30.0 

mm 

S a m p l e 


55.0 

mm 

A B C D 


20.0 mm 

45.0 mm 


[ESC]PC000;0200,0300,1,1,A,00,B=ABCD[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PC001;0200,0125,1,1,C,00,B[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PC002;0450,0550,2,2,G,33,B,+0000000001[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RC001;Sample[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RC002;001[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0002,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

5-30


(2) 

Origin (0, 0) 

30.0 

mm 


55.0 

mm 

S 0 0 1 


20.0 mm 

45.0 mm 


[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B=S001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] PV01; 0450, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B=001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150=S001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-31


5.6.3 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PV 

Function 

Format 

Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the outline font is to be 


[ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk) (, lmmmmmmmmmm) 

(, Znn) (, Po) (= ppp ------ ppp) [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Character string number 

00 to 99 

bbbb: 

cccc: 

dddd: 

eeee: 

Print origin of X-coordinate of the character string 


Print origin of Y-coordinate of the character string 


Character width 

0020 to 0300 (in 0.1 mm units) 

Height of the character 

0020 to 0300 (in 0.1 mm units) 

f: Type of font 

A: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold]) 

B: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold] proportional) 

F: Price font 2 (* Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

C, D, E, G, H, I, J: Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “B”.) 

ghhh: 

ii: 

Fine adjustment of character-to-character space 

(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.) 

g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character 

space. 

+: Increase 

-: Decrease 

hhh: No. of space dots between characters 

000 to 099 (in dots) 






5-32


j: Character attribution 

B: Black character 

W (aabb): Reverse character 

aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots) 

bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots) 

F (aabb): Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “B”.) 

aa: 01 to 99 

bb: 01 to 99 

C (aa): Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “B”.) 

aa: 01 to 99 

. Mk: Reserved area (Omissible) 

k: 0 to 2 

* Parenthesized descriptions are omissible. If “F” or “C” is specified, it is 

ignored. 

If the parenthesized values for “W: Reverse character” are omitted, the 

characters are reversed. Thus, increasing the larger of the two black 

character width or height ÷ 8 dots. 

lmmmmmmmmmm: Increment and decrement (Omissible) 

l: Designates whether to increment or decrement. 

+: Increment 

-: Decrement 

mmmmmmmmmm: Skip value 

0000000000 to 9999999999 


Znn: 

Po: 


nn: 00 to 20 

Alignment (Omissible. If omitted, the alignment is set to the left.) 

o: Designates the character position. 

1: Left 

2: Center 

3: Right 

4aaaa: Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “1”.) 

aaaa: 0050 to 1040 

ppp------ppp: 



5-33


Explanation (1) Character string number 

When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RV), the format designated by the 

character string number is selected. 


Backing 

paper 

Label 

Print origin of 

coordinates 

Effective 

print length 

Effective 

print width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 

Y 


• The print origin of coordinates must be set so the character drawing result will 

be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D). 

(3) Character width and character height 

Char. 

height 

Char. 

height 

Char. 

width 

Char. 

height 

Standard size 

(256 × 256 dots) 

Char. width 

Char. 

width 

5-34


(4) Type of font 

A: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold]) 

B: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold] proportional) 

When any value from 01 to 30 is specified, it is processed as “B: TEC FONT1”. 

F: Price Font 2 

(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space 

If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots 

between characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal 

spacing/proportional spacing determined for each character. If character-tocharacter 

space is specified, drawing will take place according to the value 

obtained by adding the character spacing/proportional spacing to the specified 

value. 


Sample 

Origin 

0° (00) 90° (11) 180° (22) 270° (33) 

5-35


(7) Selection of character attribution 


horizontal direction 

A 

B 

A 

B 


vertical direction 

Black characters 

Reverse characters 

If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing may 

become poor, or the printer may be reset. When “B: Reverses the white/black dot 

pattern in the designated area” is selected for how to clear and the black dot pattern is 

increased, note the print ratio. 


Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented each time a label is 



Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999 

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1 

1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999 

2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000 

3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001 

4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002 

5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003 


For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are 

possible. Only the numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/ 

decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the data. 



INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3 






(9) Alignment 

Origin 

Left 

Center 

Right 

5-36




“=.” Up to 100 digits can be printed. When the number of digits exceeds the maximum 

value, the excess data will be discarded. For the character code table, refer to chapter 11 

“CHARACTER CODE TABLE”. 


The value range of the reserved parameter is described in this specification. However, if 

values for the reserved parameters are specified, they are not checked. 

Notes (1) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be 

drawn. If the total bit map font, outline font, and bar code/two-dimensional code 

increment/decrement fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without 

incrementing/decrementing any excess field. The field to be incremented or 

decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer Clear 


[Examples] 


2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 02) 




6) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “AB-”) 


8) Issue Command (2 labels) 

0001 

AB-0100 

0002 

AB-0102 


0003 

AB-0104 




00000 

5-37


(2) The Outline Font Format Command may be connected to the Bit Map Font Format 

Command when transmitted. 

[ESC] PC001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] 

C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] 

C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF] 

V01; 0400, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL] 

(3) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the drawing data 

field for the previous label is automatically cleared using the character string 

number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character string 

number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated. Since 

the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C) 

and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same 

character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command 

should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the 

same character string number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command 

is sent.) 

(4) When characters overlap due to the character-to-character space fine adjustment, 

the outline font is not painted properly. Program the fine adjustment value so that 

characters will not overlap. Also, when drawings such as lines or characters are 

on the outline font drawing position, the outline font is not painted properly. The 

fine adjustment value should be set so that other drawings do not overlap the area 

in which the outline font is to be drawn. 

Refer to 

Outline Font Data Command ([ESC] RV) 

Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC) 

Bar Code/Two-dimensional Code Format Command ([ESC] XB) 

5-38


Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 

(1) 

12.5 

mm 

30.0 

mm 

S a m p l e 


55.0 

mm 

A B C D 


20.0 mm 

45.0 mm 


[ESC]PV00;0200,0300,0030,0030,B,00,B=ABCD[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PV01;0200,0125,0050,0050,B,00,B[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PV02;0450,0550,0150,0100,B,33,B,+0000000001[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RV01;Sample[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RV02;001[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0002,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

5-39


(2) 

Origin (0, 0) 

30.0 

mm 


55.0 

mm 

S 0 0 1 


20.0 mm 

45.0 mm 


[ESC]PC001;0200,0300,1,1,C,00,B=S001[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PV01;0450,0550,0200,0150,B,33,B=001[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XB01;0200,0550,3,1,02,02,06,06,02,0,0150=S001[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0002,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

5-40


5.6.4 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (WPC, CODE128, EAN128, Customer Bar Code) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 

Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the bar code is to be 


[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh (, ijjjjjjjjjj, kkk, l, mm) 

(= nnn ------ nnn) [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Bar code number 

00 to 31 

bbbb: 

cccc: 

Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code 


Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code 


d: Type of bar code 

0: JAN8, EAN8 

5: JAN13, EAN13 

6: UPC-E 

7: EAN-13 + 2digits (*Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

8: EAN-13 + 5digits (*Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

9: CODE128 (with auto code selection) 

A: CODE128 (without auto code selection) 

G: UPC-E + 2 digits (*Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

H: UPC-E + 5 digits (*Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

I: EAN-8 + 2 digits (*Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

J: EAN-8 + 5 digits (*Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

K: UPC-A 

L: UPC-A + 2 digits (*Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

M: UPC-A + 5 digits (*Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

N: EAN128 

R: Customer bar code (Postal code for Japan) 

S: Highest priority customer bar code (Postal code for Japan) 

e: Type of check digit 

3: Check digit auto attachment 

WPC Modulus 10 

CODE128 PSEUDO 103 

EAN128 PSEUDO 103 

Customer code Special check digit 

ff: 1-module width 


g: Rotational angle of bar code 

0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

hhhh: 

Height of the bar code 

0000 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units) 

For the Customer bar code, the height of the long bar is specified. 

5-41


ijjjjjjjjjj: 

Increment/decrement (Omissible) 

i: Indicates whether to increment or decrement 

+: Increment 

-: Decrement 

jjjjjjjjjj: Skip value 

0000000000 to 9999999999 


kkk: 

Length of WPC guard bar 

(Omissible. If omitted, the guard bar is not attached.) 

000 to 100 (in 0.1 mm units) 

l: Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars 

(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.) 

0: Non-print 

1: Print 

mm: 

Reserved (Omissible) 

00 to 20 

nnn ------ nnn: Data string to be printed (Omissible) 

Max. 100 digits. However, it varies depending on the type of bar code. 

* Omissible parameters (such as “Increment/decrement” and “Selection of print or nonprint 

of numerals under bars”) cannot be set when the customer bar code is selected. 

* WPC is the generic name for bar codes of JAN, EAN and UPC. 

* In the above descriptions, “customer bar code” includes the highest priority customer 

bar code. 

5-42


Explanation (1) Bar code number 

When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the 

bar code is selected. 


Backing paper 

Label 

Effective 

print 

length 


coordinates 

Y 

Effective 

print width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 


The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the bar code drawing 

result will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set 

Command ([ESC] D). 

(3) Type of bar code 

0: JAN8, EAN8 5: JAN13, EAN13 6: UPC-E 

7: EAN-13 + 2 digits 8: EAN-13 + 5digits 

9: CODE128 G: UPC-E + 2 digits H: UPC-E + 5 digits 

I: EAN-8 + 2 digits J: EAN-8 + 5 digits K: UPC-A 

5-43


L: UPC-A + 2 digits M: UPC-A + 5 digits 

N: EAN128 R: Customer bar code 

S: Highest priority customer bar code 

(4) Bar width, space width, and character-to-character space 

Designate the bar, space, and character-to-character space widths according to 

the type of bar code. Note that the designated proper value differs according to 

the rotational angle of bar code, type, number of digits, print speed, paper used, 

etc. Examples of such designations are listed below. (1 dot = 1/8 mm) 

In the case of JAN, EAN, UPC, CODE128, EAN128, a 2- to 4-module width is 

automatically calculated, when a 1-module width is designated. 

[Example of setting] 

Type of bar code 1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 

Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space 

JAN, EAN, UPC 3 6 9 12 

CODE128, EAN128 2 4 6 8 

In the case of the customer bar code 

1-module width 

(5) Rotational angle of bar code 

Point of origin 

0° 90° 180° 270° 

5-44


(6) Bar code height 

Height 

Height 

[Postal code] 

Height 

(7) Length of guard bar 

The length of guard bar is valid only when the type of bar code is WPC. 

It is ignored in all other cases. 

Height of bar code 

Length of guard bar 

(8) Numerals under bars 

Numerals are/are not provided under bars according to the parameter for print/non 

print of numerals under bars. The contents of numerals under bars to be printed 

vary according to the type of bar code. The character set of numerals under bars 

is the standard character. Such numerals are enlarged or reduced only 

horizontally according to the width of the bar code. They are drawn vertically in the 

fixed one magnification. 

[Drawing positions of numerals under bars] 

c In the case of JAN and EAN 

(Example) JAN8, EAN8 

5-45


d In the case of UPC 

(Example) UPC-E 

e In the case of bar codes other than JAN, EAN, and UPC 

(Example) EAN128 





When CODE128 (without auto code selection) is used, the number of the start code (code 

A, code B, and code C) digits is regarded as 2. 

Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999 

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1 

1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999 

2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000 

3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001 

4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002 

5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003 

5-46



For CODE128, if a data string other than numerals are included in the data, 

increment/decrement is performed. If any code which does not exist in each bar code 

table is contained in the data, increment/decrement is not performed. 

Up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are possible. Only the 

numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/decrementing, and then are 

returned to the previous position to draw the data. 



INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3 






Example of increment/decrement of data including the special codes of CODE128 

Increment/decrement calculation starts from the last digit in the data strings. When the 

data string to be calculated is numeric, and the next (upper) digit is “>”, the data is a 

special code (shown with underline below). The next digit is calculated without 

incrementing/decrementing these two digits. 

Example of increment/decrement calculation of CODE128 

Initial value 00000 00>08 0A>08 0A9>08 

INC/DEC +1 +1 +1 +1 

1st label 00000 00>08 0A>08 0A9>08 

2nd label 00001 00>09 0A>09 0A9>09 

3rd label 00002 01>00 1A>00 1A0>00 

4th label 00003 01>01 1A>01 1A0>01 

5th label 00004 01>02 1A>02 1A0>02 



“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed varies according to the types of bar 

codes. For codes, refer to chapter 12 “BAR CODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE”. 

5-47


Notes 

(1) The check digit attachment and increment/decrement processes are performed according to 

the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper, no drawing will take place. 

Increment/decrement > Attachment of check digit 

(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be drawn. If 

the total bit map font, outline font, and bar code increment/decrement fields exceeds 32, 

drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any excess field. The field to be 

incremented or decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer Clear 


[Example] 

c Format Command (Increment bar code No. 01 (+1)) 

d Format Command (Increment bar code No. 02 (+2)) 

e Image Buffer Clear Command 

f Data Command (Bar code No. 01 “0001”) 

g Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “0100”) 

h Issue Command (2 labels) 

(0001) 

(0100) 

(0002) 

(0102) 

i Issue Command (1 label) 

(0003) 

(0104) 

j Image Buffer Clear Command 

k Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “3000”) 

l Issue Command (1 label) 

(3000) 

5-48


(3) More than one Bar Code Format Command can be connected when transmitted. 

[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] 

B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL] 

(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing 

data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the bar code number, then the next 

drawing data is printed. Therefore, the bar code number which differs according to the 

drawing fields should be designated. 

(5) Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C) and 

Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same bar code number. 

In this case, the Format Command and Data Command should be sent alternately. (After 

the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same bar code number are automatically 

cleared until the Clear Command is sent.) 

Refer to 



Bar Code/Two-dimensional Code Data Command ([ESC] RB) 

Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 

12.5 

mm 


15.0 

mm 


20.0 mm 


[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 9, 3, 02, 0, 0150=12345 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-49


5.6.5 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MSI, ITF, CODE39, NW7) [ESC] XB 

Function 



Format [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, o, pp) (, q) 

(= rrr ------ rrr) [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 31 

bbbb: 

cccc: 






1: MSI 

2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 

3: CODE39 (Standard) 

4: NW7 


1: Without attaching check digit 

ff: 

gg: 

hh: 

ii: 

jj: 

Narrow bar width 


Narrow space width 


Wide bar width 


Wide space width 


Character-to-character space width 


* For MSI and ITF: 00 

k: Rotational angle of bar code 

0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

llll: 


0000 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units) 

mnnnnnnnnnn: Increment/decrement (Omissible) 

m: Indicates whether to increment or decrement 

+: Increment 

-: Decrement 

nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value 

0000000000 to 9999999999 


5-50


o: Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars 

(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.) 

0: Non-print 

1: Print 

pp: 


00 to 20 

q: Designates the attachment of start/stop code (Omissible) 

T, P, N, Omitted: Attached to Code39, not attached to NW7 

rrr------rrr: 


Max. 100 digits. However, the number of digits varies depending on 

the type of bar code. 





Backing paper 

Label 

Effective 

print 

length 


coordinates 

Y 

Effective 

print width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 





(3) Type of bar code 

1: MSI 2: Interleaved 2 of 5 

3: CODE39 (Standard) 4: NW7 

5-51








Type of bar code Narrow Wide Character-to-character 

Bar Space Bar Space 

space 

MSI 2 2 6 6 0 

ITF 2 2 6 6 0 

CODE39 2 2 6 6 2 

NW7 2 2 6 6 2 



0° 90° 180° 270° 


Height 

Height 


Numerals are/are not provided under bars according to the parameter for print/non 

print of numerals under bars. The contents of numerals under bars to be printed 

vary according to the type of bar code. The character set of numerals under bars 

is the standard character. Such numerals are enlarged or reduced only 

horizontally according to the width of the bar code. They are drawn vertically in the 

fixed one magnification. 

[Drawing positions of numerals under bars] 

In the case of CODE39 

5-52






Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999 

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1 

1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999 

2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000 

3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001 

4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002 

5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003 


For CODE39 (Standard) and NW-7, if a data string other than numerals are included in 

the data, increment/decrement is performed. If any code which does not exist in each 

bar code table is contained in the data, increment/decrement is not performed. 






INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3 






(9) Start/stop code 

[CDOE39] 

The top and the bottom characters of data are checked, and “*” will be automatically 

attached if the characters are not “*”. When the host sends data with “*” attached as the 

start/stop codes, the bar code will be drawn with “*”. 

[NW7] 

As the start and stop codes are not attached automatically, they should be attached if 

necessary. When the data is sent without start and stop codes, the bar code will be drawn 

without the codes. 





5-53


Notes 






[Example] 







(0001) 

(0100) 

(0002) 

(0102) 


(0003) 

(0104) 




(3000) 

5-54



[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] 

B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL] 










Refer to 




Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 

12.5 

mm 


55.0 

mm 

15.0 

mm 


5.0 mm 

30.0 mm 

15.0 mm 


[ESC]XB01;0050,0125,3,1,02,02,06,06,02,0,0150=12345[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XB02;0300,0550,3,1,02,03,06,07,03,3,0150,+0000000000,1,00,N[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RB02;*ABC*[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0002,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

5-55


5.6.6 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (RSS (Reduced Space Symbology)) [ESC] XB 

(Firmware V1.2 or greater) 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh (, ijjjjjjjjjj,kk) (= lll ------ lll) [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 31 

bbbb: 

cccc: 


Fixed to 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units) 




b: RSS family 

e: Version (Detailed types) 

1: RSS-14 

2: RSS-14 Stacked 

3: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional 

4: RSS Limited 

5: RSS Expanded 

ff: 




0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

hhhh: 

ijjjjjjjjjj: 


0000 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units) 

Increment/decrement (Omissible) 

i: Indicates whether to increment or decrement 

+: Increment 

-: Decrement 

jjjjjjjjjj: Skip value 

0000000000 to 9999999999 

kk: 

lll------lll: 



00 to 20 


Max. 70 digits. However, the number of digits varies depending on the 

bar code version. 

5-56






Backing paper 

Label 

Effective 

print 

length 


coordinates 

Y 

Effective 

print width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 





(3) Type of bar code (Detailed version types) 

1: RSS-14 

2: RSS-14 Stacked 3: RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional 

4: RSS Limited 

5: RSS Expanded 

5-57








1 module 2 module 3 module 4 module 


2 4 6 8 

3 6 9 12 



0° 90° 180° 270° 


[RSS-14] 

Height 

[RSS-14 Stacked] 

Height (Ratio of the upper bar code height to lower bar code height is 5 to 7.) 

[RSS-14 Stacked omnidirectional] 

Height (The height of the upper bar code and the lower bar code are equal.) 

[RSS-14 Limited] 

Height 

5-58


[RSS-14 Expanded] 

Height 

When the bar code height is set to “0000”, the bar code including guard bars and number 

under bar are not printed. 





Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999 

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1 

1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999 

2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000 

3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001 

4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002 

5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003 







INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3 










RSS-14: 

RSS-14 Stacked: 

RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional: 

RSS Limited: 

RSS Expanded: 

Fixed to 13 digits 





5-59


Notes 






[Example] 







(0001) 

(0100) 

(0002) 

(0102) 


(0003) 

(0104) 




(3000) 


[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] 

B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL] 

5-60











Refer to 




Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 

12.5 mm 


15.0 mm 


20.0 mm 


[ESC]XB01;0200,0125,b,1,02,0,0150=1234567890123[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0002,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

5-61


5.6.7 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Data Matrix) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 

Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the two-dimensional code 

is to be printed and how it is to be printed. 

[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn) (= ooo ------ ooo) 

[LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Two-dimensional code number 

00 to 31 

bbbb: 

cccc: 

Print origin of X-coordinate of the two-dimensional code 


Print origin of Y-coordinate of the two-dimensional code 


d: Type of two-dimensional code 

Q: Data Matrix 

ee: 

ff: 

gg: 

ECC type 

00: ECC000 

01: ECC050 

04: ECC050 

05: ECC050 

06: ECC080 

07: ECC080 

08: ECC080 

09: ECC100 

10: ECC100 

11: ECC140 

12: ECC140 

13: ECC140 

14: ECC140 

20: ECC200 

1-cell width 


Format ID 

01: Format ID 1 






* When ECC200 is designated as ECC type, the format ID designation is ignored. 

When format ID of 11 through 16 is designated, the selection of ECC200 is 

compulsory (to maintain compatibility with the conventional models). 

5-62


h: Rotational angle of two-dimensional code 

0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

Ciiijjj: 

No. of cells 

(Omissible. If omitted, it is automatically set.) 

iii: No. of cells in the X direction 000 to 144 

jjj: No. of cells in the Y direction 000 to 144 

* Cell setting varies according to the ECC type. 

No. of cells to be 

designated 

ECC000 to ECC140 

Odd numbers only 

ECC200 

Even numbers only 

Min./Max. No. of cells 9 × 9 to 49 × 49 10 × 10 to 144 × 144 

Rectangular code None 18 × 8 

32 × 8 

26 × 12 

36 × 12 

36 × 16 

48 × 16 

• When this parameter is omitted, the number of cells is automatically 

set. Also, when any data other than the above values are designated 

for the number of cells in the X and Y directions, the number of cells 

are automatically set. 

Jkkllmmmnnn: 

ooo ------ ooo: 

Connection setting 

(Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.) 

kk: Code number 01 to 16 

ll: No. of divided codes 02 to 16 

mmm: ID number 1 001 to 254 

nnn: ID number 2 001 to 254 


Max. 2000 digits. 

* The maximum of 2000 digits of data string to be printed and the 

maximum of 99 dots of the 1-cell width are acceptable. (The 

maximum number of digits of the data string to be printed differs 

depending on the ECC level and the contents of data.) However, 

note the following limits: 

• The maximum of 2000-digit data string to be printed are 

acceptable. However, it cannot actually be printed, since it cannot 

be contained within the 2-inch head width. 

• If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is high, printing 

may become poor, or the printer may be reset. Note the print ratio. 

• When a large value is set for the 1-cell width, decrease the number 

of digits of data to contain the data within the head width. 

5-63


Explanation (1) Two-dimensional code number 


two-dimensionl code number is selected. 


Backing paper 

Label 

Effective 

print 

length 


coordinates 

Y 

Effective 

print width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 


The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the two-dimensional 

code drawing result will be within the effective print area set by the Label 

Size Set Command ([ESC] D). 

(3) Type of two-dimensional code 


(4) 1-cell width 

1-cell width 

1-cell width = 3 

When 1-cell width is 00 for the Data Matrix, a 

two-dimensional code is not drawn. 

However, the two-dimensional code printed 

on the previous label is cleared. 

The maximum cell width is 99 dots. 

(However, the number of digits of data 

should be limited so the two-dimensional 

code can be printed within the 2-inch head 

width.) 

5-64


(5) Rotational angle of two-dimensional code 


0° 90° 180° 270° 



“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed is 2000. (However, the number of digits 

of data should be limited so the two-dimensional code can be printed within the 2-inch 

head width.) 

(7) ECC type 

Data Matrix contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error correction 

code (ECC) and restore normal data. There are several ECCs. ECC should be 

designated according to usage. The general correction ability is as follows. However, it 

may vary according to the error conditions. 

ECC type Error Correction Ability Overhead by ECC 

ECC000 0% 

Low 

ECC050 25% 

ECC080 33% 

ECC100 

High 

50% 

ECC140 75% 

ECC200 Approx. 30% 

(8) Format ID 

Data Matrix can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji. Since data 

compression rate varies according to codes, a code to be used is designated using the 

format ID. 

Format ID Code Details 

1 Numerics 0 to 9 space 

2 Letters A to Z space 

3 Alphanumerics, symbols 0 to 9 A to Z space . , - / 

4 Alphanumerics 0 to 9 A to Z space 

5 ASCII (7 bit) 00H to 7FH 

6 ISO (8 bit) 00H to FFH (Kanji) 

5-65


(9) Maximum number of digits 

The maximum number of digits varies according to the ECC type or format ID. 

Since each Kanji character uses 2 bytes, the maximum number of digits for it becomes 

half of the following values. 

ECC000 ECC050 ECC080 ECC100 ECC140 

Format ID 1 500 457 402 300 144 

Format ID 2 452 333 293 218 105 

Format ID 3 394 291 256 190 91 

Format ID 4 413 305 268 200 96 

Format ID 5 310 228 201 150 72 

Format ID 6 271 200 176 131 63 

Numeric Alphanumeric 8 bit 

ECC200 2000 2000 1556 

For the maximum number of digits in cell units, see the next page. 

(10) Connection setting 

The connection setting is used to comprise data with a set of two-dimensional codes 

when the data cannot be expressed with a two-dimensional code. When three twodimensional 

codes are used to comprise data, identification information of 1/3, 2/3, and 

3/3 is inserted into each two-dimensional code. The ID number is programmed to include 

a proper combination of two-dimensional codes when one label contains plural connecting 

symbols. For example, when there are two kinds of data containing identification 

information for 1/2 and 2/2 in the same label, combination of two-dimensional codes is 

unclear. By adding the ID number, the combination is made clearer. 

5-66


(11) Cell size and the effective data capacity 


Symbol size 

Row 

Col 

Numeric Alphanum 

capacity capacity 

8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit 

byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte 

capacity capacity capacity capacity capacity 

9 9 3 2 1 – – – – – – – – – – – – 

11 11 12 8 5 1 1 – – – – – – – – – – 

13 13 24 16 10 10 6 4 4 3 2 1 1 – – – – 

15 15 37 25 16 20 13 9 13 9 6 8 5 3 – – – 

17 17 53 35 23 32 21 14 24 16 10 16 11 7 2 1 1 

19 19 72 48 31 46 30 20 36 24 16 25 17 11 6 4 3 

21 21 92 61 40 61 41 27 50 33 22 36 24 15 12 8 5 

23 23 115 76 50 78 52 34 65 43 28 47 31 20 17 11 7 

25 25 140 93 61 97 65 42 82 54 36 60 40 26 24 16 10 

27 27 168 112 73 118 78 51 100 67 44 73 49 32 30 20 13 

29 29 197 131 86 140 93 61 120 80 52 88 59 38 38 25 16 

31 31 229 153 100 164 109 72 141 94 62 104 69 45 46 30 20 

33 33 264 176 115 190 126 83 164 109 72 121 81 53 54 36 24 

35 35 300 200 131 217 145 95 188 125 82 140 93 61 64 42 28 

37 37 339 226 148 246 164 108 214 143 94 159 106 69 73 49 32 

39 39 380 253 166 277 185 121 242 161 106 180 120 78 84 56 36 

41 41 424 282 185 310 206 135 270 180 118 201 134 88 94 63 41 

43 43 469 313 205 344 229 150 301 201 132 224 149 98 106 70 46 

45 45 500 345 226 380 253 166 333 222 146 248 165 108 118 78 51 

47 47 500 378 248 418 278 183 366 244 160 273 182 119 130 87 57 

49 49 500 413 271 457 305 200 402 268 176 300 200 131 144 96 63 

In case of ECC000, when the symbol size of the row and the column is respectively 9, the maximum number 

of digits of numeric is 3, that of alphanumeric is 2, and that of 8 bit is 1. 

5-67


Symbol size 

Row 

Col 

ECC200 



8-bit 

byte 

capacity 

10 10 6 3 1 

12 12 10 6 3 

14 14 16 10 6 

16 16 24 16 10 

18 18 36 25 16 

20 20 44 31 20 

22 22 60 43 28 

24 24 72 52 34 

26 26 88 64 42 

32 32 124 91 60 

36 36 172 127 84 

40 40 228 169 112 

44 44 288 214 142 

48 48 348 259 172 

52 52 408 304 202 

64 64 560 418 278 

72 72 736 550 366 

80 80 912 682 454 

88 88 1152 862 574 

96 96 1392 1042 694 

104 104 1632 1222 814 

120 120 2000 1573 1048 

132 132 2000 1954 1302 

144 144 2000 2000 1556 

Rectangular code 

ECC200 

Symbol size 

Row 

Col 

Numeric 

capacity Alphanum 

capacity 

8-bit 

byte 

capacity 

8 18 10 6 3 

8 32 20 13 8 

12 26 32 22 14 

12 36 44 31 20 

16 36 64 46 30 

16 48 98 72 47 

5-68


Notes 

(1) More than one two-dimensional Code Format Command can be connected when 

transmitted. 

[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] 

B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL] 


data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the two-dimensional code number, 

then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the two-dimensional code number which 

differs according to the drawing fields should be designated. 


Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same two-dimensional 

code number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command should be sent 

alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same two-dimensional 

code number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is sent.) 

Refer to 




5-69


Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 

12.5 

mm 


55.0 

mm 


5.0 mm 

30.0 mm 


[ESC] XB01; 0050, 0125, Q, 20, 05, 01, 0 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XB02; 0300, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] RB01; Toshiba TEC [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-70


5.6.8 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (PDF417) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (= jjj ------ jjj) [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 31 

bbbb: 

cccc: 






P: PDF417 

ee: 

ff: 

gg: 

Security level 

00: Level 0 

01: Level 1 

02: Level 2 

03: Level 3 

04: Level 4 

05: Level 5 

06: Level 6 

07: Level 7 

08: Level 8 



No. of columns (strings) 

01 to 30 


0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

iiii: 

Bar height 

0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units) 

jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible) 

Max. 2,000 digits 

* The maximum of 2000 digits of data string to be printed are acceptable. 

(The maximum number of digits of the data string to be printed differs 

depending on the security level and the contents of data.) However, note the 

following limits: 

• The maximum of 2000-digit data string to be printed are acceptable. 

However, it cannot actually be printed, since it cannot be contained within 

the 2-inch head width. 

• If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is high, printing may 

become poor, or the printer may be reset. Note the print ratio. 

5-71




two-dimensional code number is selected. 


Backing paper 

Label 

Effective 

print 

length 


coordinates 

Y 

Effective 

print width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 






P: PDF417 

(4) 1-module width 

When a 1-module width is designated, 2- to 6-module width is automatically 

calculated. 


Type of 2-D code 1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules 

Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space 

PDF417 2 4 6 8 10 12 

5-72




0° 90° 180° 270° 

(6) Height of two-dimensional code 

Height 

Height 





head width.) 

(8) Security level 

The PDF417 contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error correcting 

code word and restore normal data. The security level should be designated according to 

usage to perform the error correction function. 

Security level Error Correction Ability 

No. of error correction 

code words 

Level 0 0 

Level 1 Low 

2 

Level 2 6 

Level 3 14 

Level 4 30 

Level 5 62 

Level 6 126 

Level 7 High 

254 

Level 8 510 

5-73


Notes 

(9) No. of columns (strings) 

The number of rows are variable in the PDF417. The row length (No. of data strings) is 

also variable. Therefore, a symbol can be created in a form that can be easily printed, by 

changing the proportion of the height and width. The number of columns (data strings) is 

varied between 1 and 30. 

If the number of columns is too small when th data amount is large and the security level 

is high, drawing may not be performed. This is because the number of rows exceeds 90 

when the number of columns becomes small. (The number of rows of symbols is limited 

from 3 to 90.) 


transmitted. 

[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] 

B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL] 










Refer to 




5-74


Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 

12.5 

mm 


55.0 

mm 


5.0 mm 

30.0 mm 


[ESC] XB01; 0050, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XB02; 0300, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL] 


[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-75


5.6.9 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MicroPDF417) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (= jjj ------ jjj) [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 31 

bbbb: 

cccc: 






X: MicroPDF417 

ee: 

ff: 

gg: 


00: Fixed 



No. of columns/rows 

00 to 38 


0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

iiii: 

Bar height 

0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units) 

jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible) 


* The maximum of 366 digits of data string to be printed are acceptable. (The 

maximum number of digits of the data string to be printed differs depending 

on the numbers of columns, the number of rows, and the contents of data.) 

However, note the following limits: 


However, it cannot actually be printed, since it cannot be contained within 

the 2-inch head width. 



5-76






Backing paper 

Label 

Effective 

print 

length 


coordinates 

Y 

Effective 

print width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 






X: MicroPDF417 

(4) 1-module width 

When a 1-module width is designated, 2- to 6-module width is automatically 

calculated 


Type of 2-D code 1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules 


MicroPDF417 2 4 6 8 10 12 

5-77




0° 90° 180° 270° 

(6) Height of two-dimensional code 

Height 

Height 





head width.) 


The MicroPDF417 contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error 

correcting code word and restore normal data. The printer automatically sets the security 

level. 


For the MicroPDF417, not only the number of columns (data strings) but also the number 

of rows (data lines) can be designated. When these are to be designated, see the table 

on the next page. Note that the max. number of digits for the set parameter (gg) varies 

according to the character type. If data over the max. number of digits for the set 

parameter (gg) is set, the two-dimensional code is not printed. The number of columns 

(data strings) is varied from 1 to 4. However, the max. number of lines, which is 44, 

depends on the number of columns. 

5-78


(10) The maximum number of columns and rows 

Parameter 

(gg) 

No. of columns No. of rows 

Max. number of digits 

for binary mode 

Max. number of digits for 

upper case letter/space mode 


for numeric mode 

00 – – 150 250 366 

01 1 – 22 38 55 

02 2 – 43 72 105 

03 3 – 97 162 237 

04 4 – 150 250 366 

05 11 3 6 8 

06 14 7 12 17 

07 1 17 10 18 26 

08 20 13 22 32 

09 24 18 30 44 

10 28 22 38 55 

11 8 8 14 20 

12 11 14 24 35 

13 14 21 36 52 

14 2 17 27 46 67 

15 20 33 56 82 

16 23 38 64 93 

17 26 43 72 105 

18 6 6 10 14 

19 8 10 18 26 

20 10 15 26 38 

21 12 20 34 49 

22 3 15 27 46 67 

23 20 39 66 96 

24 26 54 90 132 

25 32 68 114 167 

26 38 82 138 202 

27 44 97 162 237 

28 4 8 14 20 

29 6 13 22 32 

30 8 20 34 49 

31 10 27 46 67 

32 12 34 58 85 

33 4 15 45 76 111 

34 20 63 106 155 

35 26 85 142 208 

36 32 106 178 261 

37 38 128 214 313 

38 44 150 250 366 

“–” for parameter 00 to 04 indicates the numbers of columns/rows which are automatically set by the printer. 

In this case, the pattern which has a smaller number of code words is automatically selected. When the 

numbers of code words is equal, the smaller number of columns are selected. 

5-79


Notes 


transmitted. 

[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] 

B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL] 










Refer to 




5-80


Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 

12.5 

mm 


55.0 

mm 


5.0 mm 

30.0 mm 


[ESC] XB01; 0050, 0125, X, 00, 02, 00, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XB02; 0300, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] RB01; MicroPDF417 [LF] [NUL] 


[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-81


5.6.10 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (QR Code) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (= nnn --- nnn) [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 31 

bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the two-dimensional code 


cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the two-dimensional code 



T: QR code 

e: Designation of error correction level 

L: High density level 

M: Standard level 

Q: Reliability level 

H: High reliability level 

ff: 1-cell width 


g: Selection of mode 

M: Manual mode 

A: Automatic mode 

h: Rotational angle of the two-dimensional code 

0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

Mi: Selection of model 

(Omissible. If omitted, Model 1 is automatically selected.) 

i = 1: Model 1 

2: Model 2 

Kj: Mask number 

(Omissible. If omitted, the number is automatically set.) 

j = 0 to 7: Mask number 0 to 7 

8: No mask 

Jkkllmm: Connection setting 

(Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.) 

kk = 01 to 16: Value indicating which divided code is connected. 

ll = 01 to 16: Number of divided codes 

mm = 00 to FF: A value for all data to be printed, to which XOR is applied 

in units of bytes (Not divided) 

5-82


nnn --- nnn: 



* The maximum of 2000 digits of data string to be printed and the 

maximum of 52 dots of the 1-cell width are acceptable. (The maximum 

number of digits of the data string to be printed differs depending on the 

ECC level and the contents of data.) However, note the following limits: 


However, it cannot actually be printed, since it cannot be contained 

within the 2-inch head width. 



• When a large value is set for the 1-cell width, decrease the number of 

digits of data to contain the data within the head width. 





Backing paper 

Label 

Effective 

print 

length 


coordinates 

Y 

Effective 

print width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 






T: QR code 

5-83


(4) 1-cell width 

1-cell width 

1-cell width 

When the 1-cell width is 0, a two-dimensional code is not drawn. However, the bar 

code/two-dimensional code printed on the previous label is cleared. 

The maximum cell width is 52 dots. (However, the number of digits of data should be 

limited so the two-dimensional code can be printed within the 2-inch head width.) 



0° 90° 180° 270° 





head width.) 

(7) Error correction level 

The QR code contains functions to detect and correct an error. If one of the data 

characters is damaged, the information can be restored when this code is read. 

There are 4 levels that can be designated. The level should be specified according to 

usage. The general correction ability is as follows. 

Level 

Error correction ability 

Overhead by correcting 

an error 

High density level Low 7% 

Standard level 15% 

Reliability level 25% 

High reliability level High 30% 

5-84


(8) Selection of mode 

All codes including alphanumerals, symbols, and Kanji can be used in one QR code. 

Manual mode or automatic mode can be selected to perform the operation. FFH data 

cannot be used in the automatic mode, but can be used in the manual mode. 

(9) Selection of model 

Model 1: 

Model 2: 

Original specification 

Extended specification which enhances the function of position correction 

and can contain a large amount of data. 

(10) Mask number 

To be sure the QR code is read, it is preferable that white and black modules are 

arranged in this symbol in a balanced manner. This prevents the bit pattern “1011101”, 

which is characteristically seen in the position detecting pattern, from appearing in the 

symbol as much as possible. 

The mask number is 0 to 7. The pattern is determined by placing each masking pattern 

for the mask number upon the module pattern. When the mask number is set to 8, 

masking is not performed. When the parameter is omitted, the most appropriate mask 

number is automatically selected to perform masking. 


For QR code, data can be divided into several codes. Even though there is only a narrow 

print space, the code can be entered in the space by dividing the code. The data can be 

divided into a max. of 16 codes. Parity data is obtained by XORing all input data in units 

of bytes before dividing. The input data is calculated based on shift JIS for Kanji, or on 

JIS 8 for others. Examples are shown below: 

“0123456789 ” is divided into “0123”, “4567”, and “89 ”. 

Code No. 1 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 84 Data “0123” 


Code No. 3 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 84 Data “89 ” 

* The parity data is the XORed value for “0123456789 ”. 

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 93 FA 96 7B = 85 

5-85


Notes 


transmitted. 

[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] 

B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL] 










Refer to 




5-86


Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 

12.5 

mm 


55.0 

mm 


5.0 mm 

30.0 mm 


[ESC]XB01;0050,0125,T,M,02,A,0[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XB02;0300,0550,Q,08,03,05,3[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RB01;QR Code[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RB02;Data Matrix[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0002,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

5-87


5.6.11 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Maxicode) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d (, e) (, Jffgg) (, Zh) [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 31 

bbbb: 

cccc: 






Z: Maxicode 

e: Mode selection (Omissible) 

Omitted: Mode 2 

0: Mode 2 

1: Mode 4 

2: Mode 2 

3: Mode 3 

4: Mode 4 

5: Mode 2 

6: Mode 6 

7: Mode 2 

8: Mode 2 

9: Mode 2 

Jffgg: 

Zh: 

Connection setting (Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.) 

ff: Code number 01 to 08 

gg: No. of divided codes 01 to 08 

Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block 

(Omissible. If omitted, they are not attached.) 

h= 0: No attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block 

1: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block 

2: Attachment of Zipper block 

3: Attachment of Contrast block 

5-88






Backing paper 

Label 

Effective 

print 

length 


coordinates 

Y 

Effective 

print width 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

X 

0 






Z: Maxicode 


Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the 

symbol “=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed is 93. 


For Maxicode, data can be divided into a max. of 8 codes. 

5-89


Notes 


transmitted. 

[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] 

B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL] 










Refer to 




5-90


Examples 

Origin (0, 0) 

12.5 

mm 


55.0 

mm 


5.0 mm 

30.0 mm 


[ESC] XB01; 0050, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XB02; 0300, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] RB01; Maxicode [LF] [NUL] 


[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-91


5.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO PRINT DATA 

5.7.1 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RC 

Function 

Format 

Provides data for the bit map font row. 

[ESC] RCaaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL] 

Term aaa: Character string number 

000 to 199 (Two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable.) 

bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed 


Explanation (1) Data string to be printed 

Any excess data which exceeds the maximum number of digits is discarded. 

For character codes, refer to chapter 11 “CHARACTER CODE TABLE”. 

Refer to 


Examples 

(1) 

Origin (0, 0) 


12.5 mm 

Sample 

55.0 mm 


20.0 mm 

45.0 mm 


[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] PC002; 0450, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-92


(2) 

Origin (0, 0) 

30.0 

mm 


55.0 

mm 

S 0 0 1 


20.0 mm 

45.0 mm 



[ESC] PV01; 0450, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B=001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150=S001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-93


5.7.2 OUTLINE FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RV 

Function 

Format 

Provides data for the outline font row. 

[ESC] RVaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Character string number 

00 to 99 



Any excess data will be discarded. 

For the character codes, refer to chapter 11 “CHARACTER CODE 

TABLE”. 

Refer to 

Examples 

(1) 


Origin (0, 0) 


12.5 mm 

Sample 

55.0 mm 


20.0 mm 

45.0 mm 


[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] PV02; 0450, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-94


(2) 

Origin (0, 0) 

30.0 

mm 


55.0 

mm 

S 0 0 1 


20.0 mm 

45.0 mm 



[ESC] PV01; 0450, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B=001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150=S001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-95


5.7.3 BAR CODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE DATA COMMAND (Any codes other than Maxicode) [ESC] RB 

Function 

Format 

Provides data for the bar code/two-dimensional code. 

[ESC] RBaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Bar code/two-dimensional code number 

00 to 31 


The maximum number of digits varies according to the type of bar 

code/two-dimensional code. 

Explanation 

(1) Data check 

If there is data in the data row, which does not meet the type of bar code/twodimensional 

code, the bar code/two-dimensional code will not be drawn. If wrong 

code selection takes place in the data row of CODE128 (without auto code 

selection), the bar code will not be drawn. 

If there is data different from the one designated using the format ID when Data 

Matrix is used, the symbol is not drawn. 

(2) No. of digits of data 

When data exceeding the maximum number of digits is sent, the excess data will 

be discarded. For the maximum number of digits for each bar code/twodimensional 

code, see below. 

Data Matrix, PDF417, QR code: 

MicroPDF417: 

Customer bar code: 

Highest priority customer bar code: 

Bar codes other than the above 

2000 digits 

366 digits 

20 digits 

19 digits 

100 digits 

When the number of digits does not correspond to the bar code/two-dimensional 

code type, the bar code/two-dimensional code is not drawn. 

(3) The maximum number of digits for Data Matrix varies according to the settings for 

ECC type, format ID, and the cell size. In the case of Kanji, the maximum number 

of digits is half those of the values described below since a Kanji character 

occupies 2 bytes. 

Max number of digits for Data Matrix 


Format ID 1 500 457 402 300 144 

Format ID 2 452 333 293 218 105 

Format ID 3 394 291 256 190 91 

Format ID 4 413 305 268 200 96 

Format ID 5 310 228 201 150 72 

Format ID 6 271 200 176 131 63 

Numeric Alphanumeric 8 bit 

ECC200 2000 2000 1556 

5-96


Cell Size and Effective Data Capacity 

Symbol size 

Row 

Col 




8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit 

byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte 

capacity capacity capacity capacity capacity 

9 9 3 2 1 – – – – – – – – – – – – 

11 11 12 8 5 1 1 – – – – – – – – – – 

13 13 24 16 10 10 6 4 4 3 2 1 1 – – – – 

15 15 37 25 16 20 13 9 13 9 6 8 5 3 – – – 

17 17 53 35 23 32 21 14 24 16 10 16 11 7 2 1 1 

19 19 72 48 31 46 30 20 36 24 16 25 17 11 6 4 3 

21 21 92 61 40 61 41 27 50 33 22 36 24 15 12 8 5 

23 23 115 76 50 78 52 34 65 43 28 47 31 20 17 11 7 

25 25 140 93 61 97 65 42 82 54 36 60 40 26 24 16 10 

27 27 168 112 73 118 78 51 100 67 44 73 49 32 30 20 13 

29 29 197 131 86 140 93 61 120 80 52 88 59 38 38 25 16 

31 31 229 153 100 164 109 72 141 94 62 104 69 45 46 30 20 

33 33 264 176 115 190 126 83 164 109 72 121 81 53 54 36 24 

35 35 300 200 131 217 145 95 188 125 82 140 93 61 64 42 28 

37 37 339 226 148 246 164 108 214 143 94 159 106 69 73 49 32 

39 39 380 253 166 277 185 121 242 161 106 180 120 78 84 56 36 

41 41 424 282 185 310 206 135 270 180 118 201 134 88 94 63 41 

43 43 469 313 205 344 229 150 301 201 132 224 149 98 106 70 46 

45 45 500 345 226 380 253 166 333 222 146 248 165 108 118 78 51 

47 47 500 378 248 418 278 183 366 244 160 273 182 119 130 87 57 

49 49 500 413 271 457 305 200 402 268 176 300 200 131 144 96 63 

In case of ECC000, when the symbol size of the row and the column is respectively 9, the maximum number 

of digits for numeric is 3, that of alphanumeric is 2, and that of 8 bit is 1. 

5-97


Symbol size 

Row 

Col 

ECC200 



8-bit 

byte 

capacity 

10 10 6 3 1 

12 12 10 6 3 

14 14 16 10 6 

16 16 24 16 10 

18 18 36 25 16 

20 20 44 31 20 

22 22 60 43 28 

24 24 72 52 34 

26 26 88 64 42 

32 32 124 91 60 

36 36 172 127 84 

40 40 228 169 112 

44 44 288 214 142 

48 48 348 259 172 

52 52 408 304 202 

64 64 560 418 278 

72 72 736 550 366 

80 80 912 682 454 

88 88 1152 862 574 

96 96 1392 1042 694 

104 104 1632 1222 814 

120 120 2000 1573 1048 

132 132 2000 1954 1302 

144 144 2000 2000 1556 

Rectangular code 

ECC200 

Symbol size 

Row 

Col 

Numeric 

capacity Alphanum 

capacity 

8-bit 

byte 

capacity 

8 18 10 6 3 

8 32 20 13 8 

12 26 32 22 14 

12 36 44 31 20 

16 36 64 46 30 

16 48 98 72 47 

5-98


(4) When PDF417 or MicroPDF417 is used, the number of symbol characters called 

code words is limited to 928 or less. Moreover, the data compression rate varies 

according to the contents of data. Therefore, the maximum number of digits 

according to modes is as follows. 

When letters and numerics are mixed in data in EXC mode, for example, the 

maximum values become smaller than the values below, since the internal mode 

selection code is used. 

To correct a reading error by designating the security level, the maximum value 

becomes smaller, since the error correction code words below are used. 

When the number of the code words exceeds 928, or when the number of rows 

exceeds 90, the symbols are not drawn. 

For the MicroPDF417, the numbers of rows and columns can be specified. 

The maximum number of digits varies according to the setting. 

In the case of PDF417 

• Extended Alphanumeric Compaction (EXC) mode: 

• Binary/ASCII Plus mode: 

• Numeric compaction mode: 

In the case of MicroPDF417 

• Binary mode: 

• Upper case letter/space mode: 

• Numeric compaction mode: 

1850 digits 

1108 digits 

2000 digits 

150 digits 

250 digits 

366 digits 

No. of Error Correction Code Words of PDF417 

For the MicroPDF417, the printer 

sets the security level automatically. 



code words 

Level 0 0 

Level 1 Low 

2 

Level 2 6 

Level 3 14 

Level 4 30 

Level 5 62 

Level 6 126 

Level 7 High 

254 

Level 8 510 

5-99


The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417 

Parameter 

(gg) 

No. of columns 

No. of rows 


for binary mode 

Max. number of digits for 

upper case letter/space mode 


for numeric mode 

00 – – 150 250 366 

01 1 – 22 38 55 

02 2 – 43 72 105 

03 3 – 97 162 237 

04 4 – 150 250 366 

05 11 3 6 8 

06 14 7 12 17 

07 1 17 10 18 26 

08 20 13 22 32 

09 24 18 30 44 

10 28 22 38 55 

11 8 8 14 20 

12 11 14 24 35 

13 14 21 36 52 

14 2 17 27 46 67 

15 20 33 56 82 

16 23 38 64 93 

17 26 43 72 105 

18 6 6 10 14 

19 8 10 18 26 

20 10 15 26 38 

21 12 20 34 49 

22 3 15 27 46 67 

23 20 39 66 96 

24 26 54 90 132 

25 32 68 114 167 

26 38 82 138 202 

27 44 97 162 237 

28 4 8 14 20 

29 6 13 22 32 

30 8 20 34 49 

31 10 27 46 67 

32 12 34 58 85 

33 4 15 45 76 111 

34 20 63 106 155 

35 26 85 142 208 

36 32 106 178 261 

37 38 128 214 313 

38 44 150 250 366 

* The maximum of 2000 digits of data string to be printed are acceptable. However, note the following limits: 

• The maximum of 2000-digit data string to be printed are acceptable. However, it cannot actually be 

printed, since it cannot be contained within the 2-inch head width. 

• If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is high, printing may become poor, or the printer may be 

reset. Note the print ratio. 

5-100


(5) CODE128 code selection 

In the case of CODE128 (with auto code selection), code selection is performed in 

the following manner. (Conforming to USS-128 APPENDIX-G) 

c Determining the start character 

(a) If the data begins with four or more consecutive numerals, the start code 

to be used is (CODE C). 

(b) In any case other than (a) in c, if a control character appears before a 

small letter (see f.) or four or more consecutive numerals, the start code 

is (CODE A). 

(c) In none of the above cases, the start code is (CODE B). 

d If the data begins with an odd number of digits in (a), c: 

(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the last numeric 

data. When (FNC1), if found in the number, breaks a pair of digits in the 

number, insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character before the numeric 

data preceding the (FNC1). Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should 

conform to (b) and (c) in c. 

e If four or more digits of numeric data continue in (CODE A) or (CODE B). 

(a) When the numeric data is an even number of digits, insert the (CODE C) 

character just before the first numeric data. 

(b) When the numeric data is an odd number of digits, insert the (CODE C) 

character immediately after the first numeric data. 

f If a control character appears in (CODE B): 

(a) In the subsequent data, when a small letter appears before the next 

control character or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT) 

character before the first control character. 

(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first control 

character. 

g If a small letter appears in (CODE A): 

(a) In the subsequent data, when a control character appears before the next 

small letter or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT) 

character before the first small letter. 

(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first small 

letter. 

h If any data other than the numerals appears in (CODE C): 

(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the data other 

than the numerals. Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should conform 

to (b) and (c) in c. 

5-101


(6) CODE128 code selection check 

Check if selection of (CODE A), (CODE B), or (CODE C) of CODE128 has been 

set correctly. If an error is found, the bar code will not be drawn. 

[Conditions causing an error] 

c No start code is designated. 

d A small letter (including { , | , } , ~, _ ) is found in (CODE A). 

e A control character is found in (CODE B). 

f Any data other than the numerals, (FNC1), (CODE A), and (CODE B) is found 

in (CODE C). 

g There are two or more consecutive (SHIFT) characters. 

h The number in (CODE C) is an odd number of digits. 

i (SHIFT) is followed by (CODE A), (CODE B) or (CODE C). 

(7) Kanji code selection 

• In the case of Data Matrix, PDF417, and QR code, Kanji codes can be printed. 

Shift JIS and JIS 8 codes can be mixed. 

(8) When manual mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code 

c Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode 

Mode selection 

Data to be printed 

d Binary mode 


No. of data strings 

(4 digits) 


e Mixed mode 

Data “,” (comma) Data “,” (comma) Data 

The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji. 

Since data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used is 

designated when the mode is selected. 

Mode Code Details 

N Numerals 0 to 9 

A Alphanumerics, symbols A to Z 0 to 9 space 

$ % * + - . / : 

B Binary (8-bit) 00H to FFH 

K Kanji Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal 

If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code. 

5-102


(9) When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code. 


c How to send the control code data 

NUL (00H) = > @ (3EH, 40H) 

SOH (01H) = > A (3EH, 41H) 

STX (02H) = > B (3EH, 42H) 

GS (1DH) = > ] (3EH, 5DH) 

RS (1EH) = > ^ (3EH, 5EH) 

US (1FH) = > _ (3EH, 5FH) 

d How to send the special codes 

> (3EH) = > 0 (3EH, 30H) 

5-103


(10) Transfer code for QR code 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p 

1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q 

2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r 

3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s 

4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t 

5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u 

6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v 

7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w 

8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x 

9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y 

A LF SUB * : J Z j z 

B VT ESC + ; K [ k { 

C FF FS , < L \ l | 

D CR GS - = M ] m } 

E SO RS • > N ^ n ~ 

F SI US / ? O _ o DEL 

* The shaded parts are Japanese. 

They are omitted here. 

FFH data cannot be used in the automatic mode, but can be used in the manual mode. 

(11) Examples of data designation for QR code 

c Alphanumeric mode: ABC123 

A A B C 1 2 3 


Designation of mode 

d Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H 

B 0 0 0 6 > A > C > E 




e Mixed mode 

Numeric mode : 123456 

Kanji mode : Kanji data 

Binary mode : a i u e o 

Alphanumeric mode : ABC 

N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a i u e o , A A B C 

Data to be Data to be No. of Data to be printed Data to be 

printed 

printed data strings 

printed 


f Automatic mode 

When the data above (e) is designated in automatic mode: 

1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a i u e o A B C 


5-104


Examples 

(1) 

Origin (0, 0) 


12.5 mm 

15.0 mm 

55.0 mm 


20.0 mm 

30.0 mm 

15.0 mm 


[ESC]XB01;0100,0125,3,1,02,02,06,06,02,0,0150[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XB02;0300,0550,3,1,02,04,07,08,04,3,0150,+0000000000,1,00,N[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RB01;12345[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RB02;*ABC*[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0002,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

5-105


(2) 

Origin (0, 0) 

55.0 

mm 

30.0 

mm 

S 0 0 1 



20.0 mm 

45.0 mm 



[ESC] PV01; 0450, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B=001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150=S001 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-106


(3) 

Origin (0, 0) 

12.5 

mm 


55.0 

mm 


20.0 mm 

30.0 mm 


[ESC]XB01;0100,0125,P,04,02,03,0,0010[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XB02;0300,0550,Q,08,03,05,3[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RB01;PDF417[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RB02;Data Matrix[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0002,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

5-107


5.7.4 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE DATA COMMAND (Maxicode) [ESC] RB 

Function 

Provides data for the two-dimensional code. 

Format For mode 2 or 3: 

[ESC] RBaa; bbbbbbbbbcccdddeeeee --- eeeee [LF] [NUL] 

For mode 4 or 6: 

[ESC] RBaa; fffffffffggggg --- ggggg [LF] [NUL] 


bbbbbbbbb: Postal code Fixed as 9 digits 

• Mode 2: 

b1b2b3b4b5: Zip code Fixed as 5 digits (Numerics) 

b6b7b8b9: Zip code extension Fixed as 4 digits (Numerics) 

• Mode 3: 

b1b2b3b4b5b6: Zip code Fixed as 6 digits (Character “A” of code set) 

b7b8b9: Vacant Fixed as 3 digits (20H) 

ccc: Class of service Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics) 

ddd: Country code Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics) 

eee --- eee: Message data strings 84 digits 

fffffffff: Primary message data strings 9 digits 

ggg --- ggg: Secondary message data strings 84 digits 

Explanation 

(1) When any value other than numerics is included in the data string of zip code 

(mode 2), zip code extension, class of service, or country code, a Maxicode is not 

drawn. 

(2) If the message data is less than 84 digits when mode 2 or 3 is selected, the printer 

adds a CR (000000) at the end of the data, and the remaining digits will be padded 

with FSs (011100). When message data exceeding 84 digits is received, the 

excess data will be discarded before drawing a Maxicode. 

(3) If the message data is less than 93 digits (9 digits + 84 digits) when mode 4 or 6 is 

selected, the printer adds a CR (000000) at the end of the data, and the remaining 

digits will be padded with FSs (011100). When message data exceeding 93 digits 

is received, the excess data will be discarded before drawing a Maxicode. 

(4) Mode 6 should not be used for usual operation since it is used for scanner 

programming. 

(5) No. of digits of data 

The data exceeding the maximum number of digits, the excess data will be 

discarded. 

The maximum number of digits varies according to the mode. In mode 2 or 3 and 

mode 4 or 6, the maximum number of digits is 84 and 93, respectively. 

5-108


5.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO ISSUE AND FEED 

5.8.1 ISSUE COMMAND [ESC] XS 

Function 

Format 

Issues labels according to the print conditions programmed. 

[ESC] XS; I, aaaa, bbbcdefgh [LF] [NUL] 

Term aaaa: Number of labels to be issued 

0001 to 9999 

bbb: 

Reserved area 

000 to 100 

c: Type of sensor 

0: No sensor 

1: Reflective sensor 

2: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels) 



d: Reserved area 

C, D, E 


1 to 9, A 

f: Reserved area 

0 to 2 

g: Reserved area 

Fixed as 1 

h: Type of status response 

0: No status response 

1: Status response 

Explanation (1) Number of labels to be issued 

c If increment/decrement is not specified, the designated number of pieces with 

the same drawing data will be issued. 

d If increment/decrement is specified, the designated number of pieces will be 

issued while incrementing/decrementing the piece of the designated drawing 

area. 

e In strip mode, one label is forcefully printed, regardless of the specified 

number of labels to be issued. 

* The increment/decrement designation is valid until the Image Buffer Clear 


5-109


(2) Type of sensor 

c No sensor: Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the 

Label Size Set Command. 

d Reflective sensor: 

Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size 

Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the tag 

paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the paper position is 

finely adjusted for every piece. 

e Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels): 

Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size 

Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by the 

transmissive sensor and the paper position is finely adjusted for every piece. 

(3) Issue mode 

[C: Batch mode (Issue count: 3)] 

• “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to OFF in the system mode. 

Head position 

(1) Idling (at the home position) 

A 

(2) Prints the 1st label (A). 

A 

B 

(3) Prints the 2nd label (B). 

A B C 

(4) Prints the 3rd label (C). 

(4) Status response 

When the option with status response has been selected, a status response is 

made at the end of printing or if an error occurs. 

In the batch mode, the print end status response is made after printing on the 

designated number of labels. 

In the strip mode, the status response is made after printing one label. 

* Do not change the parameter for status response/no status response during 

printing. Otherwise the status response may not be performed properly. 


The reserved parameters are not checked. 

5-110


Notes 

(1) The settings for the type of sensor and the status response are protected in 

memory (even if the power is turned off). 

(2) When the sensor is specified, even if a gap or a black mark is detected within less 

than 90% of the effective print length specified by the Label Size Set Command, it 

is ignored. 

However, this is not applicable when the programmed media pitch is less than 

40mm. When this media is used and a gap or a black mark is detected within less 

than 90% of the effective print length, the detected gap or black mark will be 

effective. As a result, printing will stop even if it is halfway. 

(3) The printer supports the two issue modes: batch mode and strip mode. In the 

batch mode, the printer starts printing after performing a back feed regardless of 

the selected sensor type. In the strip mode, a back feed is not performed. 

* With the firmware V1.3 or greater, a back feed is not performed even in batch 

issue mode if there is no print data to be printed within 2.1 mm from the top of the 

print area. 


2.1mm 

When there is no print data to be 

printed in this area, the printer starts 

printing without performing a back 

feed. 

Examples 

73.2 

mm 

41.0 

mm 

S a m p l e 

76.2 

mm 

• Issue count: 4 pieces 

• Paper: Tag paper (Reflective 

sensor used) 

• Status response: On 

15.0 mm 

48.0 mm 

[ESC] D0762, 0480, 0732 [LF] [NUL] 



[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL] 


[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C8001 [LF] [NUL] 

5-111 

Paper feed direction


5.8.2 FEED COMMAND [ESC] T 

Function 

Format 

Feeds the paper. 

[ESC] Tabcde [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Type of sensor 

0: No sensor 

1: Reflective sensor 

2: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels) 



b: Reserved area 

0 to 1 

c: Reserved area 

C, D, E 


1 to 9, A 


0 to 2 

Explanation 

(1) Type of sensor 

c No sensor: 

Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size 

Set Command. 

d Reflective sensor: 


Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the tag 

paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the stop position is 

finely adjusted. 

e Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels): 


Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by the 

transmissive sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted. 

(2) Feed mode 

Head position 

(1) Place paper. 

(2) Completes a feed. 

(Completes feeding to the top of paper and stops.) 



5-112


Notes (1) If a change of label size or type of sensor, or the position fine adjustment is made, 

one label must be fed to align the paper with the first print position prior to printing. 

Examples 

(2) The setting for the “type of sensor” is protected in memory (even if the power is 

turned off). 

(3) When “status response” is specified by the Issue Command, a status response is 

made after the end of feed or when an error occurs. 

73.2 

mm 

41.0 

mm 

S a m p l e 

76.2 mm 


15.0 mm 

48.0 mm 

[ESC] D0762, 0480, 0732 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] AX; +010, +000, +10 [LF] [NUL] 



[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL] 


[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C3001 [LF] [NUL] 

5-113


5.9 COMMANDS RELATED TO FORMAT 

5.9.1 FLASH MEMORY FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1 

Function 

Format 

Formats (initializes) the flash memory for storage. 

[ESC] J1; a (, b) [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Formatting (initializing) range 

A: All area of flash memory 

B: PC save area of flash memory 

C: Writable character storage area of flash memory 

b: Reserved area (Omissible) 

0 to 2 

Explanation 

(1) The storage area of flash memory can be roughly divided into the PC save area 

and the writable character storage area. They can be formatted (initialized) either 

separately or at the same time. 

(2) When using flash memory for the first time, the area to be used must be formatted 

(initialized) before the PC interface command is saved or writable characters are 

stored. 

(3) After flash memory is formatted, the remaining memory is the PC save area (192 

Kbytes) and the writable character storage area (64 Kbytes). 

(4) When the already stored data (PC interface commands or writable characters) is 

stored again, memory is consumed with every storing unless the Flash Memory 

Format Command ([ESC] J1) is transmitted. 

(5) When the label issue operation is performed after the Flash Memory Format 

Command is sent, the image buffer is automatically cleared. 



Notes 

(1) The storage area is automatically optimized. 

(2) The writable character storage area is shared between the TPCL-LE mode and the 

LABEL mode. Therefore, if flash memory is initialized, writable characters stored in 

the LABEL mode are also erased. 

Refer to 

Example 

• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) 

• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO) 

• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP) 

[ESC] J1; A, 1 [LF] [NUL] 

5-114


5.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO WRITABLE CHARACTERS 

5.10.1 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND [ESC] XD 

Function 

Format 

Stores writable characters and logos into flash memory. 

[ESC] XD; (Sj, ) aa, b, ccc, ddd, eee, fff, ggg, h, iii ------ iii [LF] [NUL] 

Term Sj: Reserved area (Omissible) 

j: 0 to 2 

aa: 

Writable character set 

01 

41 16 × 16 dots 

42 24 × 24 dots 

b: Writable character code 

20H to FFH (Set in hex.) 

40H to 7EH, 80H to FCH (When the writable character set is 41 or 42) 

ccc: 

ddd: 

eee: 

fff: 

ggg: 

Left offset 

000 to 719 (in dots) 

Top offset 

000 to 719 (in dots) 


001 to 720 (in dots) 

Character height 

001 to 720 (in dots) 

Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing 

000 to 999 (in dots) 

h: Type of writable character data 

0: Nibble mode (4 bits/byte) 

1: Hex. mode (8 bits/byte) 

iii --- iii: 

Writable character data to be stored 

* If each parameter for left offset, top offset, character width, character height, and 

horizontal spacing/proportional spacing is fixed as “000”, the setting is ignored when 

the writable character set is 41 or 42. 

5-115


Explanation (1) Type of writable character 

The maximum number of characters varies depending on the writable character 

size and number of characters because of the limited memory capacity. For 

writable character sets 41 or 42, each writable character size is fixed. 

(2) Character code 

Up to 224 characters can be stored per character set. The maximum number of 

characters are 1 set × 224 characters = 224 characters. It varies depending on 

the writable character size and the number of characters because of the limited 

memory capacity. For character sets 41 and 42, a character code consisting of 1 

byte is stored. However, when the character code is called up, F0H is added to 

the upper digit of it, and consists of 2 bytes. In this case, up to 188 characters can 

be stored per character set. 

(3) Reserved area 

Even if any value is set regardless of the value range, it is accepted. 

(4) Each parameter 

Top 

offset 

Char. 

height 

Base line 

Reference 

point 

Reference point 

of next char. 

Left 

offset 

Char. width 


5-116


(5) Writable character set: 01 

Char. width 26 dots 

Nibble mode 

1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 3FH 5 3CH 6 30H 7 30H 8 30H 

Char. 

height 

31 dots 

9 3FH 10 3CH 11 37H • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 240 30H 

241 3FH 242 3FH 243 3FH 244 3CH 245 30H 246 30H 247 30H 248 30H 

Hex. mode 

1 00H 2 0FH 3 C0H 4 00H 

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 

8 

8 8 8 

5 FCH 6 7FH 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 120 00H 

121 FFH 122 FCH 123 00H 124 00H 

[Nibble mode] 

(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the 

following order (1 → 248). (High order digit: “3”) 

(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH. 

(3) The minimum unit of character width is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as 

data 0. 

(4) The number of bytes of the writable character to be stored must be as follows: 

The number of bytes of the writable character to be stored = 

{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots × 2 

* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number. 

[Hex. mode] 

(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in 

the following order (1 → 124). 

(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH. 

(3) The minimum unit of character width is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as 

data 0. 

(4) The number of bytes of the writable character to be stored must be as follows: 

The number of bytes of the writable character to be stored = 

{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots 


5-117


(6) Writable character set: 41 (16×16 dots ) 

Character width 16 dots 

Nibble mode 

1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 30H 

Character 

height 

16 dots 

5 30H 6 31H 7 38H 

• 

• 

• 

58 31H 59 38H 60 30H 

61 30H 62 30H 63 30H 64 30H 

4 

4 

4 

4 

Hex. mode 

8 

8 

1 00H 2 00H 3 01H 4 80H 

5 01H 6 80H 7 01H 

• 

• 

• 

26 80H 27 01H 28 80H 

29 01H 30 80H 31 00H 32 00H 

[Nibble mode] 



(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH. 

(3) The number of bytes of the writable character to be stored should be 64 bytes. 

[Hex. mode] 





* When writable character 41 is designated, the width and height of the character are both 16 

dots. 

5-118


(7) Writable character set: 42 (24×24 dots ) 

Character width 24 dots 

Nibble mode 

1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 30H 5 30H 6 30H 

Character 

height 

24 dots 

7 30H 8 30H 9 33H 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 137 30H 138 30H 

139 30H 140 30H 141 30H 142 30H 143 30H 144 30H 

Hex. mode 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

4 

1 00H 2 00H 3 00H 

4 00H 5 3CH 6 00H 

8 

8 

8 

• 

• 

• 

• 

67 00H 68 3CH 69 00H 

70 00H 71 00H 72 00H 

[Nibble mode] 



(2) The data of writable the writable character to be stored should be 144 bytes. 

[Hex. mode] 





* When writable character 42 is designated, the width and height of the character are both 

24 dots. 

(8) No matter what character set or character code is selected, no memory will be wasted. 

(9) A character code already stored can be stored in flash memory again, if the Bit Map Writable 

Character Store Command ([ESC] XD) is transmitted. However, memory will be consumed 

with every storage. Memory can be efficiently used by sending the Flash Memory Format 

Command ([ESC] J1) before storing. 

5-119


Notes 

(1) With the same writable character set designated, character width and character height can be 

designated for each writable character code. In other words, character size can be changed 

for each character, thus saving memory. 

(2) Proportional spacing and descending characters are possible by the parameters of horizontal 

spacing/proportional spacing, left offset, and top offset. 

(3) When top offset is 000, the reference coordinates are at the above left when drawing because 

the base line is at the top. (Coordinate setting is facilitated for logos.) 

(4) The resolution of the width and height is 8 dots/mm respectively. Writable character 01can be 

printed in a size of up to 48 mm x 90 mm. (This is because the effective print width is 384 dots 

though the character width is settable up to 720 dots.) 

Refer to Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1) 

5-120


Examples Writable character set: 01 

Writable character code: 70H 

Top 

offset 

22 dots 

Char. 

height 

31 dots 

Base line 

Reference 

point 

Reference 

point of next 

char. 

Left offset 

2 dots 

Char. width 26 dots 


30 dots 

[ESC] J1; C [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XD; 03, p, 002, 022, 026, 031, 030, 0, 000?


5.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO GRAPHICS 

5.11.1 GRAPHIC COMMAND [ESC] SG 

Function 

Format 

Term 

Draws graphic data. 

[ESC] SG; aaaa(D), bbbb(D), cccc, dddd, e, fff --- fff [LF] [NUL] 

aaaa(D): Print origin of X-coordinate for drawing graphic data 


* If “D” is attached after a 4-digit value, the coordinate is specified in dots. 

0000D ~ 

bbbb(D): Print origin of Y-coordinate for drawing graphic data 


* If “D” is attached after a 4- or 5-digit value, the coordinate is specified in 

dots. 

0000D ~ 

cccc: 

dddd: 

No. of graphic width dots 

Fixed as 4 digits (in dots) 

However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected, this 

designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is contained in 

the graphic data.) 

No. of graphic height dots 

4 or 5 digits (in dots) 

However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected, this 

designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is contained in 

the graphic data.) 

When “3: TOPIX compression mode” is selected for the type of graphic data: 

Resolution of graphic data: *only two types 

0150: 150 DPI (The data is drawn in double resolution.) 

0300: 300 DPI (The data is drawn in single resolution.) 

e: Type of graphic data 

0: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) Overwrite drawing 

1: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte) Overwrite drawing 

2: BMP file mode Overwrite drawing 

3: TOPIX compression mode Overwrite drawing 

4: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) OR drawing 

5: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte) OR drawing 

6: PCX file mode Overwrite drawing 

7: TOPIX compression mode XOR drawing 

fff --- fff: Graphic data 

5-122


Explanation (1) When the graphic data “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, or “6” is selected, the graphic data is drawn 

by overwriting the image buffer. 

(2) When the graphic data “4” or “5” is selected, the graphic data is drawn by carrying 

out OR between the graphic data and the data in the image buffer. 

(3) When the graphic data “7” is selected, the graphic data is drawn by carrying out 

OR between the graphic data and the data in the image buffer. 

Backing paper 

Label 

Effective 

print length 

Graphic 

height dots 


coordinates 

Graphic width 

dots 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

Y 

Effective 

print width 


X 

0 

5-123



coordinates 

Graphic 

height 

22 dots 

Graphic width 19 dots 

Nibble mode 

1 30H 2 30H 3 33H 4 30H 5 30H 6 30H 

7 30H 8 30H • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 126 30H 

127 33H 128 3FH 129 30H 130 30H 131 30H 132 30H 

4 4 4 4 4 4 

8 8 

8 

Hex. mode 

1 00H 2 30H 3 00H 

4 00H 5 38H 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

63 00H 

64 3FH 65 00H 66 00H 

[Nibble mode] 

(1) The graphic data is separated into four dot units and sent in the following 

order (1 → 132). (High order digit: “3”) 

(2) The graphic data is 30H to 3FH. 

(3) The minimum unit of graphic width is 8 dots. Dots with no data are 

transmitted as data 0. 

(4) The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted must be as follows: 

The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted = {(No. of graphic 

width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic height dots × 2 


[Hex. mode] 

(1) The graphic data is separated into eight dot units and sent in the following 

order (1 → 66). 

(2) The graphic data is 00H to FFH. 

(3) The minimum unit of graphic width is 8 dots. Dots with no data are 

transmitted as data 0. 

(4) The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted must be as follows: 

The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted = {(No. of graphic 

width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic height dots 


5-124


[When TOPIX compression mode is selected] 

First line 

Range for length 

Second line 

Graphic data 

Length 

L1 

L1 

L2 

L3 

(1) Length: Total number of bytes of the graphic data (0001H ~ ) 

Ex. Length = 20 bytes: 0 0 1 4 

(2) L1 parameter: Shows in which large block (512 dots/block) the changed data is contained. 

7 

6 

5 

4 3 2 1 0 

L1 

0: Not present 

1: Present 

512 dots 

512 dots 

512 dots 

(3) L2 parameter: Shows in which medium block (64 dots/block) the changed data is contained 

(of the L1 large block). 

7 

6 

5 

4 3 2 1 0 

L2 


1: Present 

64 dots 

64 dots 

64 dots 

(4) L3 parameter: Shows in which small block (8 dots/block) the changed data is contained (of 

the L2 medium block). 

7 

6 

5 

4 3 2 1 0 

L3 


1: Present 

8 dots 

8 dots 

8 dots 

Exclusive-OR is carried out between the current image data and the 

image data one line previous. Only the changed bit is set to ON (1). The 

alignment of dots is MSB (left dots) and LSB (right dots). 

* The graphic width for only the smaller value of either the designated value or the max. buffer 

size (512 KB) is drawn. The minimum unit of the data drawing is 8 dots (1 byte). If the graphic 

width is set to 3 dots, it will be reset to 8 dots (1 byte). 

5-125


Notes (1) The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of drawing the graphic 

data will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command 

([ESC] D). 

(2) The number of graphic width dots and the number of graphic height dots must also 

be set so that the result of drawing the graphic data will be within the effective print 

area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D) in the same manner as the 

above. 

(3) Both width and height are 8 dots/mm. The maximum graphic size is 48 mm x 90 

mm. 

(4) The actual result of drawing may deviate within ±0.5 in the X direction with respect 

to the designated print origin of the X-coordinate. 

To draw the received graphic data at high speed, the data is directly 

developed in the image buffer without applying correction to each bit with 

respect to the designated X-coordinate. Consequently, a variation of up to 4 

bits occurs. 

Examples 

10.0 mm 

24.0 mm 

Origin 

(0, 0) 


Graphic 

height 

22 dots 


[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0022, 0, 003000003800003000037000033800031 

000300007?


[TOPIX compression mode] 

10.0 mm 

24.0 mm 

Origin 

(0, 0) 


Graphic 

height 

22 dots 

[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0300, 3, 00 5C 80 80 40 30 

Length L1 L2 L3 Data (1st line) 

80 80 40 08 80 80 40 04 80 80 40 02 80 80 40 09 

(2nd line) (3rd line) (4th line) (5th line) 

80 80 60 04 80 80 80 60 02 40 80 80 40 01 80 80 20 20 

(6th line) (7th line) (8th line) (9th line) 

80 80 20 80 80 80 20 80 80 80 20 20 80 80 40 01 


80 80 60 02 40 80 80 A0 0F 80 80 80 C0 30 C3 80 80 80 40 


80 80 80 80 80 80 40 10 00 80 80 C0 80 20 80 80 C0 40 C0 [LF] [NUL] 

(18th line) (19th line)(20th line) (21st line) (22nd line) 

5-127


5.12 COMMANDS RELATED TO PC COMMAND SAVING 

5.12.1 SAVE START COMMAND [ESC] XO 

Function 

Format 

Declares the start of saving PC interface commands. 

(Places the printer in the mode where PC interface commands can be written in flash 

memory.) 

[ESC] XO; aa, (Sb, ) c [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Identification number to be used for saving in flash memory or calling 

01 to 99 

Sb: 


b: 0 to 2 

c: Status response at save time 

0: No status response made 

1: Status response made 

Explanation (1) Reserved area (Omissible) 


Notes (1) After sending the Save Start Command ([ESC] XO), any command other than the 

following will be saved into flash memory without being analyzed. 



• Saved Data Call Command ([ESC] XQ) 

• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) 

• Reset Command ([ESC] WR) 

• Status Request Command ([ESC] WS, [ESC] FM, [ESC] v) 

• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1) 

• Mode Information Acquire Command ([ESC] WX) 

• Version Information Acquire Command ([ESC] WV) 

• Device Address Acquire Command ([ESC] IT) 

• Strip Sensor Threshold Value Set Command ([ESC] AH) 

• Printer ID Set Command ([ESC] ID) 

• Mode Select Command ([ESC] M) 

(2) No error check is made for the commands at save time. 

(3) Up to 64 KB can be saved per a save. 

Refer to 

Examples 


• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1) 

[ESC]J1;B[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XO;01,0[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]D0508,0480,0468[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]T20C30[LF][NUL] 


[ESC]PC001;0200,0125,1,1,A,00,B[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PC002;0650,0350,2,2,G,33,B,+0000000001[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XP[LF][NUL] 

5-128


5.12.2 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND [ESC] XP 

Function 

Format 

Note 

Refer to 

Declares the termination of saving PC interface commands. 

[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL] 

After the PC interface command is stored, the image buffer will be automatically cleared. 

Save Start Command ([ESC] XO) 

5-129


5.12.3 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND [ESC] XQ 

Function 

Format 

Calls PC interface commands saved in flash memory. 

[ESC] XQ; aa, (Sb,) c, d [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Identification number of the file to be called from flash memory. 

01 to 99 

Sb: 


b: 0 to 2 

c: Status response when the data is called up 

0: No status response made 

1: Status response made 


L, M 

Explanation (1) Reserved area (Omissible) 


Notes (1) If the relevant save identification number is not found, an error will result. 

(2) The printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) when the Save Data Call 

Command is sent after the Save Terminate Command. 

Refer to 

Examples 



[ESC] XQ; 01, 0, L [LF] [NUL] 


[ESC] RC002; 100 [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL] 

5-130


5.13 COMMANDS RELATED TO CHECK 

5.13.1 HEAD BROKEN DOTS CHECK COMMAND [ESC] HD 

Function 

Format 

Checks the thermal head for broken dots. 

[ESC] HD001 (, a) [LF] [NUL].................All broken dots check 

Term a: Check result status response (Omissible) 

A: Status response made 

(If omitted, the check result status response is not made.) 

Explanation 

(1) The Head Broken Dots Check Command is subject to batch processing. If the 

Label Issue Command for 100 labels is transmitted, followed by the Head Broken 

Dots Check Command, the head broken dots check will be executed after issuing 

100 labels. 

(2) The head broken dots check will be made on all the heating elements of the 

thermal head. 

(3) When the check result status response is not specified, if the check result is found 

to be normal, the next command is processed. If the check result is found to be 

abnormal, an error occurs. Whether or not the status is sent when an error occurs 

is determined according to the setting for the status response specified by the Issue 

Command. 

When the check result status response is specified, if the check result is found to 

be normal, a head broken dots check normal end status is sent, and then the next 

command is processed. If the check result is found to be abnormal, the head 

broken dots error status is sent, and then the printer stops. 

Status for normal end (for IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth, wireless LAN) 

[SOH] [STX] “0020000” [EXT] [EOT] [CR] [LF] 

Status for head broken dots error (for IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth, wireless 

LAN) 

[SOH] [STX] “1720000” [EXT] [EOT] [CR] [LF] 

(4) All broken dots check takes approx. 1 second. 

Examples 


[ESC]PC001;0200,0125,1,1,C,00,B[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PC002;0450,0550,2,2,G,33,B[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RC001;Sample[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]RC002;001[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XS;I,0002,0002C3000[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]HD001[LF][NUL] 

5-131


5.14 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL 

5.14.1 RESET COMMAND [ESC] WR 

Function 

Format 

Explanation 

Returns the printer to its initial state. 

[ESC] WR [LF] [NUL] 

(1) The printer is returned to the same state as when the power is turned on. 

(2) If the printer receives this command during printing, the printer prints the label 

which is being printed, then performs initialization. 

(3) After the Reset Command is sent (or after printing is completed, if printing is 

performed when the Reset Command is sent), the next command must not be sent 

within 5 seconds. In IrDA: TEC Protocol, if ACK/status transmission is specified by 

the Issue Command, the printer returns an ACK, which indicates the command 

process end, to the EOT after the printer is initialized. In RS-232C, when the status 

response is specified, the printer returns the status (34H 30H). After this status is 

received, the next command may be sent. In IrDA: IrCOMM, Bluetooh, or Wireless 

LAN, the printer does not return the status. 

(4) When this command is sent through the IrDA interface, only this command should 

be sent. After the command is sent, the link should be terminated. Even if the host 

does not terminate the link, the printer performs the termination process. 

Therefore, after initialization is completed, the host should establish the link again. 

(5) When receiving this command during data transmission, the printer is initialized 

after transmission is completed. 

Notes 

Example 

(1) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or the 

Graphic Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Reset Command is not processed 

until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data. 


5-132


5.15 COMMANDS RELATED TO STATUS 

5.15.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WS, [ESC] FM, [ESC] v 

Function 

Format 

Sends the printer status to the host computer. 

[ESC] WS [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] FM (aa) [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] v 

Term aa: Reserved area (Omissible) 

00 to 99 

Explanation 

(1) This command makes the printer send its status regardless of the setting of “status 

response/no status response.” The status to be transmitted is the current printer 

status, and indicates the latest status only. The remaining count indicates the 

remaining count of the batch currently being printed. No count remaining of the 

batch waiting to be printed is transmitted. 

[IrDA: TEC Protocol] 


02H xxH xxH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH xxH xxH 

Printer status 

Remaining No. of labels 

• 0000 to 9999 

Status type 

“1” (31H): Status Request Command 

“2” (32H): Automatic status transmission 

5-133


[IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN] 



Remaining No. of labels (“0000” to “9999”) 

Status type 















(“40”: Normal issue end) For automatic status response 

(“41”: Normal feed end) For automatic status response 




Notes (1) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command. 

(2) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic 

Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not processed 

until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data. 

(3) In IrDA: TEC Protocol or RS-232c, a max. delay of 20 msec may occur until the 

printer sends the status after receiving the Status Request Command. 

(4) The interval from when the Status Request Command is sent to when the next 

Status Request Command is sent should be 20 msec or more. If the interval is 

less than 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive the Status Request Command. 

Example 


5-134


5.15.2 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX 

Function 

Format 

Explanation 

Sends the printer mode information to the host. 

[ESC] WX [LF] [NUL] 

(1) The mode information format to be sent to the host, is as follows: 


STX Mode information (16 bytes) CRC CRC 

T P C L - L E SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP 

02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 2DH 4CH 45H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH 


SOH STX Mode information (16 bytes) ETX EOT CR LF 

T P C L - L E SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP 

01H 02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 2DH 4CH 45H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH 

The above is an example where the message is received in the TPCL-LE mode. In addition, the 

message of “LABEL”, “RECEIPT”, or “RECEIPT1” is returned. In case of the TPCL-LE1 mode, the 

message will be “TPCL-LE1”. 

• TPCL-LE mode (Mode = A): “TPCL-LE” 

• TPCL-LE1 mode (Mode = B): “TPCL-LE1” 

Example 


5-135


5.15.3 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WV 

Function 

Format 

Explanation 

Sends information such as the program version of the printer. 

[ESC] WV [LF] [NUL] 

(1) The format of the program version data to be returned to the host, is as follows. 


STX 

02H 

“1” 31H 

“0” 30H 

“M” 4DH 

“A” 41H 

Creation date “R” 52H 

“2” 32H 

“0” 30H 

“0” 30H 

“3” 33H 

“B” 42H 

“-“ 2DH 

“S” 53H 

Model “P” 50H 

“2” 32H 

“D” 44H 

SP 20H 

“V” 56H 

“1” 31H 

Version “.” 2EH 

“0” 30H 

“A” 41H 

CRC 

xxH 

CRC 

xxH 

Creation date of program: 

9 bytes of data indicated in order of Day- 

Month-Year 

Model: 

7 bytes of ASCII code indicating the 

model 

Program version: 

5 bytes of data: Vx.xx 

Revision 

Version 

5-136



SOH 

01H 

STX 

02H 

“1” 31H 

“0” 30H 

“M” 4DH 

“A” 41H 

Creation date “R” 52H 

“2” 32H 

“0” 30H 

“0” 30H 

“3” 33H 

“B” 42H 

“-“ 2DH 

“S” 53H 

Model “P” 50H 

“2” 32H 

“D” 44H 

SP 20H 

“V” 56H 

“1” 31H 

Version “.” 2EH 

“0” 30H 

“A” 41H 

ETX 

03H 

EOT 

04H 

CR 

0DH 

LF 

0AH 

Creation date of program: 

9 bytes of data indicated in order of Day- 

Month-Year 

Model: 

7 bytes of ASCII code indicating the 

model 

Program version: 

5 bytes of data: Vx.xx 

Revision 

Version 

Example 

[ESC] WV [LF] [NUL] 

5-137


5.16 COMMANDS RELATED TO Bluetooth AND WIRELESS LAN 

5.16.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT 

Function 

Format 

Explanation 

Calls up the device address of the Bluetooth module or MAC address of the wireless 

LAN module connected to the printer. 

[ESC] IT [LF] [NUL] 

(1) This command calls up the device address of the Bluetooth or MAC address of the 

wireless LAN module. On receiving this command, the printer returns the Bluetooth 

device address or MAC address with the complenents of the following information 

field. When using the IrDA: TEC Protocol, the following information field is placed 

in the information frame and sent in packets. 

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used] 

STX Bluetooth device address CRC 

02H 12 bytes xxH xxH 

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth, or wireless 

LAN is used] 

SOH STX Bluetooth device address ETX EOT CR LF 

01H 02H 12 bytes 03H 04H 0DH 0AH 

Example 


When Bluetooth device address is 0001ccf0042b, the printer sends the following 

information. 

Bluetooth device address: 

[30H] [30H] [30H] [31H] [63H] [63H] [66H] [30H] [30H] [34H] [32H] [62H] 

0 0 0 1 c c f 0 0 4 2 b 

5-138

6. LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS) 



This chapter describes details regarding the interface commands for the LABEL mode of the print 

mode. There are two issue types, “Batch issue” and “Strip issue”. In batch issues, a back feed is 

basically not performed before printing, regardless of the selected sensor type. However, when the 

parameter of the back feed is selected by the Position Fine Adjust Command, a back feed is 

performed before printing. (Firmware V1.4 or greater) 

In strip issues, a back feed is not performed regardless of the parameter setting. 


Format 

Command 



[ESC]D Label Size Set Command No 

[ESC]ID Printer ID Set Command Yes 

[ESC]M 



TPCL-LE. 

[ESC]AX 


No, when it is included in storage of 

forms. 

[ESC]AY 


No, when it is included in storage of 

forms. 

[ESC]AZ Strip Sensor Adjust Command Yes 

[ESC]LC Line Format Command No 

[ESC]PC Bit Map Font Format Command No 

[ESC]PV Outline Font Format Command No 

[ESC]XB Bar Code Format Command No 

X ([ESC]X) Data Print Command Yes 

[ESC]T Feed Command Yes 

[ESC]J1 Flash Memory Format Command Yes 

[ESC]XD Bit Map Writable Character Command Yes 

[ESC]SG Graphic Command No 

[ESC]N Graphic Field Command No 

[ESC]XO Save Start Command No 

[ESC]XP Save Terminate Command Yes 

[ESC]XQ Saved Data Call Command No 

[ESC]HD Head Broken Dots Check Command Yes 

[ESC]WR 

[ESC]@ 

Initialize Command 


(TEC Protocol) or RS-232C. 

ESC]WS Status Request Command --- 

[ESC]FM 

[ESC]v 



6-1






z There is the following control code: 

ESC (1BH), LF (0AH), NUL (00H) 


Function 

Format 








in practice. 


transmitted. 

Term 





Explanation 

Note 

Refer to 

Examples 





[ESC] FM [LF] [NUL] 


1B 46 4D 0A 00 

[ESC] F M [LF] [NUL] 





6-2



6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND [ESC] D 

Function 

Format 

Sets the size of a label or tag. 

[ESC] Daaaa, bbbb, cccc [LF] [NUL] 

Term aaaa: Pitch length of the label or tag 

0100 to 5070 (in 0.1 mm units) 

bbbb: 

cccc: 


Fixed as 0480 

Effective print length 

0070 to 5000 (in 0.1 mm units) 

Explanation 

(1) After the Form Store Start Command is sent, the Label Size Set Command must be 

sent before each field command, the Print Density Fine Adjust Command, or the 

Position Fine Adjust Command is sent. 

(2) To print data in non-print area at 5 mm from the leading edge of the label, the print 

start position can be changed by using the Position Fine Adjust Command. 

However, it is necessary to enlarge the gap between the labels. 

(3) The print origin of coordinates in the Y direction is at 6.5 mm from the center of the 

gap (black mark). When the gap (black mark) is 3 mm, the print origin of 

coordinates in the Y direction is at 5 mm from the leading edge of the label. (Refer 

to the figure below.) 

0 X 


0 X 


Y 

Y 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 


Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 


6.5 mm 5 mm 

6.5 mm 5 mm 

Effective 

print length 

Label 

pitch 

Effective 

print length 

Label 

pitch 

Backing paper 

Label 

Black mark 

(Printed on the 

back of receipt) 

[Label] 

[Receipt with black marks] 

6-3


Notes (1) The label pitch length is protected in memory (even if the power is turned off). 

Example 

[ESC] D0430, 0480, 0330 [LF] [NUL] 

48.0 mm 

48.0 mm 

5.0 mm 

5.0 mm 

33.0 mm 

33.0 mm 

43.0 mm 43.0 mm 

2.0 mm 

2 mm 

Programmable value range by the software 

[mm] 

Item Paper Label Receipt 

Issue Batch Strip with black marks 

Label pitch Min. 10.0 13.0 10.0 

Max. 167.0 67.0 507.0 

Label length Min. 7.0 10.0 7.0 

Max. 160.0 60.0 500.0 

Backing paper width Min. 28.0, 31.0, 34.0, 37.0, 40.0, 43.0, – 

Max. 46.0, 49.0, 52.0, 55.0, 58.0 ± 0.5 

Label width Min. 25.0 – 

Max. 55.0 

Paper width Min. – 28.0, 31.0, 34.0, 37.0, 40.0, 43.0, 

Max. – 46.0, 49.0, 52.0, 55.0, 58.0 ± 0.5 

Gap length Min. 3.0 

Max. 7.0 

Black mark length Min. – 3.0 

Max. – 7.0 

Margins of backing Min. 1.5 – 

paper Max. 7.0 – 

Effective print width Min. 48.0 

Max. – 

Effective print length Min. 7.0 

Max. 160.0 60.0 500.0 

Slow up interval 2.25 

Non-printable area Min. 1.0 (when the gap or black mark length is 7.0 mm) 

Max. 

5.0 (when the gap or black mark length is 3.0 mm) 

6-4


6.3.2 ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID 

Function 

Format 





b: Reserved area (Omissible) (* Firmware V1.3 or greater) 

Fixed to 0 

Explanation 

Notes 










Example 


[ESC] ID ; [03H] [51H] [LF] [NUL] 


6-5



Function 

Format 




7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 





1: Performed 







42H TPCL-LE1 Continues printing (Firmware V1.5 or greater) 


is not performed.) (Firmware V1.1 or greater) 





Explanation 


















LABEL modes. 


FEED button. 

6-6


Notes 



off). 





































performed. 





6-7


Normal mode 










TPCL-LE mode 




is canceled. 


LABEL mode 




RECEIPT mode 




RECEIPT1 mode 



TPCL-LE1 mode 





6-8



6.4.1 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX 

Function 

Format 

Adjusts the feed value so that the label will be shifted forward or backward from the 

standard print start position. 

[ESC] AX; abbb (,cddd, eff) [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a fine adjustment is to 

be made. 

+: Backward 

-: Forward 

bbb: 

cddd: 

eff: 

Feed value to be finely adjusted. 

000 to 150 (in 0.1 mm units) 

Reserved area (Omissible) (* Firmware V1.4 or greater) 

+000 (Fixed.) 

* This parameter must be set when the back feed is performed. 

Back feed amount fine adjustment value (Omissible) (* Firmware V1.4 or 

greater) 

+20 (Fixed.) 

* If omitted, the back feed is not performed. 

Explanation 

(1) The print start position is adjusted to stop backward or forward from the standard 

print start position. 

(2) When the back feed amount fine adjustment value is set, the print start position 

moves backward by 2mm from the standard position, which enlarges the effective 

print area. 

(3) When any value other than the above is set, a command error will occur. 

(4) If this command is stored in a form, the print position is automatically adjusted 

when the form is invoked. 

(5) If this command is not stored in a form, the print position is adjusted when the 

command is received. 

(6) When the power is turned on again, the backed up fine adjustment value is set. 

(7) When the print position is changed, or when the gap between the labels is not 3 

mm, the Position Fine Adjust Command should be used as required. (When the 

gap between the labels is 3 mm, the standard print start position is 5 mm from the 

leading edge of the label.) 

6-9



± 0 mm 


(Standard: 5 mm from the leading edge of the label) 

+5 mm 


-5 mm 


Notes 

(1) The set print position fine adjustment value is protected in memory (even if the 

power is turned off). 

(2) The factory default value is 0.0 mm. 

(3) The fine adjustment values changed by the Position Fine Adjust Command in the 

TPCL-LE mode, are also effective for the LABEL mode. 

(4) When the back feed amount fine adjustment value is set, the printing starts at 3 

mm from the leading edge of the label. 

(5) The back feed amount fine adjustment value will be effective only when it is 

transmitted between the Form Store Start Command and the Form Store Terminate 

Command. Otherwise, the value will be ignored. 

6-10



Function 

Format 






bb: 



c: Print mode 

1 (Fixed): Direct thermal 






Explanation (1) The default value for the head output division designation is “1”. 




(4) If this command is stored in a form, the print density is automatically adjusted when 

the form is invoked. 

(5) If this command is not stored in a form, the print density is adjusted when this 

command is received. 









(8) When “3: Auto1” is designated, it will be automatically changed to “Divided by 3” if 

the battery level becomes 2, in order to stable the print quality. As a result, the print 

speed will be reduced. 

Notes 

(1) The set print density fine adjustment value and the head output division 

designation, are protected in memory (even if the power is turned off). 

(2) The fine adjustment values changed by the Print Density Fine Adjust Command in 

the TPCL-LE mode, are also effective for the LABEL mode. 

(3) When the head output division designation is omitted, the backed up value in 

memory is used. 

6-11


6.4.3 STRIP SENSOR ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AZ 

Function 

Format 


[ESC] AZ; a [LF] [NUL] 






4: Reserved 



(2) This command is sent after the backing paper of the label to be used, is positioned 

on the strip issue path and the cover is closed. The printer reads the sensor 

adjustment value for the backing paper, and then sets the threshold value to switch 

the mode between strip and batch. (When this command is sent, the backing 

paper must be loaded on the strip issue path. If the backing paper is loaded on the 

batch issue path, or the label is loaded, and the command is sent, the mode will not 

be switched properly.) 

Notes 




factory. 










this command. 

6-12



6.5.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] LC 

Function 

Format 

Sets the line format and draws the line. 

[ESC] LC; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, f [LF] [NUL] 

Term aaaa: Start point X-coordinate 


bbbb: 

cccc: 

dddd: 

Start point Y-coordinate 


End point X-coordinate 


End point Y-coordinate 


e: Type of line 

0: Line (horizontal, vertical) 

1: Rectangle 

f: No. of line width dots 

1 to 9 (in 0.1 mm units) 

Explanation 

(1) The relation between the coordinates of the start and end points and the width of 

the line, is as follows: 

c Horizontal line (In the case of |Y 2 - Y 1 | = 0) 

(X 1,Y 1) (X 2,Y 2) 

Line width 

d Vertical line (In the case of |X 2 - X 1| = 0) 

(X 1,Y 1) 

(X 2,Y 2) 

Line width 

6-13


e Rectangle 

(X 1,Y 1) 

(X 2,Y 2) 

Line width 

(X 2,Y 2) (X 1,Y 1) 

Line width 

Line width 

Line width 

(2) When the start and end point coordinates which make a slant line are specified, a rectangle 

is drawn, even if “Line” is selected for the line type. 

(3) If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing may 

become poor, or the printer may be reset. When a horizontal line is to be drawn, note the 

print ratio. 

(4) When the coordinates, which make data over the head width, is specified, printing is not 

guaranteed. 

6-14


6.5.2 BIT MAP FONT FIELD COMMAND [ESC] PC 

Function 

Format 

Sets the format indicating the position on the label at which the bit map font is to be 


[ESC] PCaa ; bbbb, cccc, d, e, f, gg, h, ii, j, k (, Pl) [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Character string No. 

00 to 99 

(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the 

outline font field, and the bar code/two-dimensional field.) 

bbbb: 

cccc: 

Print origin of X-coordinate of character string 




d: Character horizontal magnification 

1: 0.5 magnification 5: 2.5 magnification 

2: 1 magnification 6: 3 magnification 



e: Character vertical magnification 






A: Standard (12×24 dots) 

B: Bold Character (48×96 dots) 

C: Writable Character (24×24 dots) 

D: Price Font 1 (16×40 dots) 

E: Price Font 2 (32×48 dots) 

F: Times Roman (Bold) (21 point) 

G: Helvetica (Bold) (18 point) 

H: Letter Gothic (Medium) (14.3 point) 

I: Courier (Medium) (15 point) 

J: Presentation (Bold) (27 point) 

O: GOTHIC725 Black (6 point) 

gg: 

Rotational angles of a character or character string 

00: 0° (chara.) 0° (chara.-string) 




h: Selects black character or reverse character 

B (Fixed value): Black character 

6-15


ii: 

Data length 

00 to 99 NOTE: When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the 

data sent by the Data Print Command. 

JIS 8 code: Data which is separated by [LF] 

Packed BCD code: Data which is delimited by “F” 

j: Data code 

1: JIS 8 code (Fixed as 1 when the type of font is “C” (Writable character).) 

2: Packed BCD code (only for IrDA: TEC Protocol) 

k: Fixed data No. 

0 (Fixed value) 

Pl: 

Print position (Omissible. If omitted, the print position is left-aligned.) 

0: Left 

1: Center 

2: Right 

Explanation 

(1) Character string No. 

The data in the Data Print Command (X) is selected and linked in the order of this 

character string No. (The format of character string Nos. 00 and 01 is linked to 

the first and second data, respectively. In the same order, the format is linked to 

the data.) Therefore, the Nos. of the bit map font character string, the outline font 

character string, and the bar code/two-dimensional code, should be consecutive, 

starting from 00 (in ascending order). The same No. must not be used in one 

form for the bit map font character string field, the outline font character string 

field, and the bar code/two-dimensional code field. 



0 X 

Y 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

Label 

Backing paper 

Effective 

print length 

Sample 


coordinates 


6-16


(3) Horizontal magnification and vertical magnification 

Horizontal mag.: 1 

Vertical mag.: 1 



Vertical 

magnification 

Horizontal 

magnification 





NOTE: When a large character or many characters is/are printed, the print 

density may become lower. (When the print ratio per line is high, the print 

density may become lower.) 

(4) Space between characters is described below. 

[Standard character] 

24 dots 

Horizontal 

mag.: 2 

12 dots 12 dots 12 dots 

24 dots 

24 dots 

24 dots 

[Bold character] 

96 dots 

48 dots 48 dots 48 dots 48 dots 48 dots 

6-17


[Price font 1 (Horizontal mag.: 1)] 

40 dots 

16 dots 16 dots 16 dots 16 dots 

[Price font 1 (Horizontal mag.: 2)] 

40 dots 



Sample 

Origin 

0° 90° 180° 

270° 

(6) Data length, Data code 

JIS 8 code .................... The length that one-byte data is counted as one digit 

Packed BCD................. The length before packed 

Data code Data Data to be sent Data length 

JIS 8 1 2 3 4 5 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 5 

Packed BCD 1 2 3 4 5 12H 34H 50H 5 

* When the same data is sent, the data length to be set is the same value in both 

data codes, JIS 8 and Packed BCD. 

6-18


(7) Print position 

• Left (Default) 

Origin 

• Center 

• Right 

Origin 

Origin 

Example 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 


Effective 

print length 

Sample 

(3 mm, 12 mm) 

Bit map font character 

string No. 00 

Standard character (2×2) 

Label 

Backing paper 


[ESC]D0430,0480,0400[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PC00;0030,0120,4,4,A,00,B,00,1,0,P0[LF][NUL] 


Data Print Command (only for IrDA: TEC Protocol) 

X[01H][01H][01H]SAMPLE[LF] 

6-19


6.5.3 OUTLINE FONT FIELD COMMAND [ESC] PV 

Function 

Format 

Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the outline font is to be 


[ESC] PVaa ; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f, (,ghh), ii, j, kk, l, m, (,Pn) (,Qoooo,Rppp) [LF] 

[NUL] 

Term aa: Character string No. 

00 to 99 


outline font field, and the bar code/two-dimensional code field.) 

bbbb: 

cccc: 

dddd: 

eeee 

Print origin of X-coordinate of character string 





0020 to 0300 (in units of 0.1 mm) 




A: TEC Font 1 (Helvetica: Bold) 

B: TEC Font 1 (Helvetica: Bold, Proportional) 

C: Reserved 

D: Reserved 

E: Reserved 

F: Price Font 2 (* Firmware V1.2 or greater) 

ghh: 

ii: 

Character-to-character space width (Omissible. If omitted, the character-tocharacter 

space width depends on the 

designated font.) 

g: +, - 

hh: 00 to 99 (dot) 






j: Selects black character or reverse character 

B (Fixed value): Black character 

kk: 

Data length 

00 to 99 NOTE: When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the 


JIS 8 code: Data which is delimited by [LF] 


l: Data code 

1: JIS 8 code (Fixed as 1 when the type of font is “C”.) 


6-20


m: Fixed data No. 


Pn: Print position (Omissible. If omitted, the print position is left-aligned.) 

P0: Left 

P1: Center 

P2: Right 

Qoooo: Character string width (Omissible. If omitted, the width is set to 0000.) 

0000 to 1600 (in units of 0.1mm) 

Rpp: No. of character string digits (Omissible. If omitted, the number of digits is 00.) 

00 to 99 

Explanation 

(1) Character string No. 


character string No. (The format of character string Nos. 00 and 01 is linked to 

the first and second data, respectively. In the same order, the format is linked to 

the data.) Therefore, the Nos. of the bit map font character string, the outline font 

character string, and the bar code/two-dimensional code, should be consecutive, 

starting from 00 (in ascending order). The same No. must not be used in one 

form for the bit map font character string field, the outline font character string 

field, and the bar code/two-dimensional code field. 



0 X 

Y 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

Label 

Backing paper 

Effective 

print length 

Sample 


coordinates 


(3) Character width and character height 

Char. 

width 

Char. 

height 

Char. 

height 

Char. 

height 

Char. 

height 

Char. 

width 

Char. width 

Standard size 

(256 × 256 dots) 

6-21 

Char. width


NOTE: When a large character or many characters is/are printed, the print density 

may become lower. (When the print ratio per line is high, the print density may 

become lower.) 


Sample 

Origin 

0° 90° 180° 

270° 

(5) Print position 

• Left (Default) 

Origin 

• Center 

• Right 

Origin 

Origin 

(6) Character string width and number of character string digits 

Usually, one character size is determined by the character width and height. When 

the character string width and number of character string digits are specified, the 

character width will be automatically changed when printed. If the following 

conditions are satisfied, however, these parameter settings become ineffective, and 

the characters are printed in normal size. 

• Conditions of ineffectiveness 

(1) These parameters are omitted. 

(2) The character string width is set to “0”. 

(3) No. of print data ≥ No. of specified character string digits 

Conditions that these parameters become effective are described on the following 

pages. 

6-22


c When one field width < specified character string width 

(Space between characters = 0, Specified character string digits = 6) 

„ Print image when the parameter setting is omitted. 

1 field width (140 dots) A 

A B C D 

One character width (35 dots) 

Specified character string width (200 dots) 

A=Specified character string width – 1 field width=200 dots – 140 dots=60 dots 

B=A/Data length=60 dots/4=15 dots 

One character width=1 character width+B=35 dots+15 dots=50 dots 

„ Print image when the parameter setting is specified. 


A B C D 


* When the number of print data is 6 digits or more, the condition of 

ineffectiveness (3) is satisfied. In this case, the characters are printed in 

normal width. 

d When one field width < specified character string width 

(Space between characters ≥ 0, Specified character string digits = 5) 



A B C D 

Space between characters (5 dots) 



A=Specified character string width – 1 field width=200 dots – 155 dots=45 dots 

B=A/Data length=45 dots/4§11 dots 





A B C D 




normal width. 

6-23


e When one field width < specified character string width 

(Space between characters < 0, Specified character string digits = 8) 



A B C D 


Space between characters (-5 dots) 


Corrected space between characters=((Specified character string digits – data 

length(x0.5+1) x Space between characters=-15 dots 

A=Specified character string width – (1 character width x Data length+(corrected 

space between characters x (Data length – 1))=200 dots – 95 dots = 105 dots 

B=A/Data length=105 dots/4§26 dots (rounded down) 





A B C D 




normal width. 

6-24


f When one field width ≥ specified character string width 

(Space between characters ≥ 0, Specified character string digits = 6) 


1 field width (215 dots) 

One character width (50dots) 


A B C D 


A 

A=1 field width – Specified character string width=215 dots – 120 dots=95 dots 

B=A/Data length=95 dots/4§24 dots (rounded up) 

One character width=1 character width – B=50 dots – 24 dots=26 dots 



A B C D 





normal width. 

6-25


g When one field width ≥ specified character string width 

(Space between characters < 0, Specified character string digits = 5) 


1 field width (185 dots) 


One character width (50dots) 

A B C D 


A 

A=1 field width – Specified character string width=185 dots – 120 dots=65 dots 

B=A/Data length=65 dots/4=17 dots (rounded up) 

One character width=1 character width – B=50 dots – 17 dots=33 dots 


A B C D 






normal width. 

Example 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 


Effective 

print length 

Sample 

(3 mm, 12 mm) 

Outline font character 

string No. 00 

TEC Font 1 (80×80 mm) 

Label 

Backing paper 


[ESC]D0430,0480,0400[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PV00;0030,0120,0050,0050,A,00,B,00,1,0,P0[LF][NUL] 


Data print command (Only for IrDA: Tec Protocol) 

X[01H][01H][01H]SAMPLE[LF] 

6-26


Commands to be registered 


[ESC]D0780,0480,0750[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]AY;+00,1,0[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]AX;+000[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PV01;0325,0350,0080,0100,F,-08,03,B,00,1,0,P2,Q0300,R07[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]PV02;0165,0000,0030,0060,F,02,B,00,1,0[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XB03;0270,0290,5,3,02,2,0100,000,0,00,1,0[LF][NUL] 

[ESC]XB04;0270,0170,5,3,02,2,0100,000,0,00,1,0[LF][NUL] 


Issue command (in case of IrDA) 

i) 

X[05H][01H][01H] 

$12.00[LF] 

$12.00[LF] 

214901881186[LF] 

291890001200[LF] 

ii) 

X[05H][01H][01H] 

$80[LF] 

$80[LF] 

214901881186[LF] 

291890001200[LF] 

6-27


6.5.4 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MSI, ITF, CODE39, NW7) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa ; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll, m, nn, o, p [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Bar code No. 

00 to 99 


outline font field, and the bar code field.) 

bbbb: 

cccc: 

Print origin of X-coordinate of bar code 


Print origin of Y-coordinate of bar code 



1: MSI 

2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 

3: CODE39 (Standard) 

4: NW7 


1 (Fixed value): Without attaching check digit 

ff: 

gg: 

hh: 

ii: 

jj: 

Narrow bar width 

02 to 03: 2 to 3 dots 

Narrow space width 

02 to 03: 2 to 3 dots 

Wide bar width 

05 to 09: 5 to 9 dots 

Wide space width 

05 to 09: 5 to 9 dots 

Character-to-character space width 

02 to 03: 2 to 3 dots 

* Only for MSI and ITF, “00” can be set. If any value is set, the printer 

automatically changes it to “00”. 

k: Rotational angle of bar code 

0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

llll: 


0001 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units) 

m: Selection to print numerals under bars 

0: Non-print 

1: Print 

6-28


nn: 

Data length (including start/stop codes) 

00 to 32 NOTE: When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to 

the data sent by the Data Print Command. 



o: Data code 

1: JIS 8 code 


p: Fixed data No. 


6-29


6.5.5 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (JAN8/EAN8, JAN13/EAN13) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa ; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh, iii, j, kk, l, m [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 99 



bbbb: 

cccc: 






0: JAN/8EAN8 

5: JAN13/EAN13 


3 (Fixed value): Check digit auto attachment 

ff: 


02 to 03 (in units of dots) 


0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

hhhh: 

iii: 


0001 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units) 


000 to 050 (in 0.1 mm units) 

j: Selection to print numerals under bars 

0: Non-print 

1: Print 

kk: 

Data length 

07: JAN8/EAN8 

12: JAN13/EAN13 

00: NOTE: When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the 




l: Data code 

1: JIS 8 code 




6-30


6.5.6 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (EAN128) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 





00 to 99 



bbbb: 

cccc: 






N: EAN128 



ff: 




0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

hhhh: 

iii: 


0001 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units) 




0: Non-print 

1: Print 

kk: 

Data length 

00 to 32 (only even numbers) 

NOTE: 

When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the 




l: Data code 

1: JIS 8 code 




6-31


6.5.7 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (CODE128) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa ; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh, iii, j, kkk, l, m [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 99 



bbbb: 

cccc: 






9: CODE128 



ff: 




0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

hhhh: 

iii: 


0001 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units) 




0: Non-print 

1: Print 

kkk: 

Data length 

00 to 100 (Both odd and even numbers) 

NOTES: 1. A two-digit value can be entered. 

2. When “00” or “000” is designated, the length is equivalent to 

the data sent by the Data Print Command. 



l: Data code 

1: JIS 8 code 




6-32


Examples of using commands in EAN128/CODE128 

~ Form storage 

[ESC] ID; 01H23H [LF] [NUL] 

: ID setting 

[ESC] XO; 01, 1 [LF] [NUL] 

: Declaration of the start of form storage 

[ESC] D0360, 0480, 0330 [LF] [NUL] 

: Label size setting 

[ESC] XB00; 0000, 0080, N, 3, 2, 0, 0090, 000, 0, 24, 2, 0 [LF] [NUL] : Format of bar coce No. 00 

EAN128: 00 ~ 32 

CODE128: 00 ~ 100 

9: CODE128 

N: EAN128 


: Declaration of the termination of form storage 

~ Drawing and issue (for IrDA: TEC Protocol) 

[STX] 01H 23H 10H X 01H 00H 03H 97H 15H 01H 83H 06H 32H 13H 11H 50H 00H 50H 01H [CRC] [CRC] 

Bar code data (971501830632131150005001) 

(*1) Check digit of Modulus 10 is not 

attached by the printer. Therefore, the 

check digit should be calculated in 

advance, then be sent as data. 

No. of labels to be issued: 3 

Transmissive sensor designated, No status response made 

Form No.: 1 

Packet length (10H = 16 bytes) 

Printer ID (0123H) 

(*1) How to calculate the Modulus 10 check digit (When bar code data is 971501830632131150005001.) 

9 7 1 5 0 1 8 3 0 6 3 2 1 3 1 1 5 0 0 0 5 0 0 1 

- û - û - û - û - û - û - û - û - û - û - û - û 

Sum up the numbers in the column of ’-‘: 33 

33 x 3 (fixed number) = 99 

Sum up the numbers in the column of ‘û’: 29 

29 x 1 (fixed number) = 29 

Add the above two numbers: 99 + 29 = 128 

Subtract the lowest digit of 128 from 10 (fixed number): 10 – 8 = 2 

The obtained number ‘2’ is attached to the end of the bar code data. 

9 7 1 5 0 1 8 3 0 6 3 2 1 3 1 1 5 0 0 0 5 0 0 1 2 

Bar code data Check digit of Modulus 10 

6-33


6.5.8 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Customer Bar Code) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 





00 to 99 



bbbb: 

cccc: 






R: Customer bar code (Postal code for Japan) 

S: Highest priority customer bar code (Postal code for Japan) 



ff: 




0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

hhhh: 

iii: 

Height of long bars 

0001 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units) 

Reserved area 


j: Reserved area 


kk: 

Data length 

00 to 20: Customer bar code 

00 to 19: Highest priority customer bar code 

NOTE: When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the data sent 

by the Data Print Command Data which is delimited by [LF]) 

l: Data code 

1: JIS 8 code 



6-34


6.5.9 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (PDF417) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa ; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii, kk, l, m [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Two-dimensional code No. 

00 to 99 


outline font field, and the two-dimensional code field.) 

bbbb: 

cccc: 

Print origin of X-coordinate of two-dimensional code 


Print origin of Y-coordinate of two-dimensional code 



P: PDF417 

ee: 

ff: 

gg: 


00: Level 0 

01: Level 1 

02: Level 2 

03: Level 3 

04: Level 4 

05: Level 5 

06: Level 6 

07: Level 7 

08: Level 8 




01 to 30 


0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

iiii: 

Bar height 

0001 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units) 

6-35


kk: 

Data length 

00 to 99 

NOTES: 1. The value should consist of 2 digits 

2. When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the data 

sent by the Data Print Command. 

(JIS 8 code: Data which is delimited by [LF]) 

Data having a max. of 2000 digits is acceptable. 

3. In IrDA: TEC Protocol, when the data length value is set to 250 

or more, it can be sent by using the multiple packet format for 

the Data Print Command in several packets. 

l: Data code 

1 (Fixed value): JIS 8 code 



6-36


Examples of using commands in PDF417 

~ Form storage 

[ESC] ID; 01H23H [LF] [NUL] 

: ID setting 

[ESC] XO; 01, 1 [LF] [NUL] 

: Declaration of the start of form storage 

[ESC] D0360, 0480, 0330 [LF] [NUL] 

: Label size setting 

[ESC] XB00; 0000, 0000, P, 00, 02, 06, 0, 0010, 00, 1, 0 [LF] [NUL] : Format of two-dimensional code No. 00 


: Declaration of the termination of form storage 

~ Drawing and issue (for IrDA: TEC Protocol) 

Command packet in the case that 300-byte issue data is designated in PDF417 

(Since the data length is 250 bytes or more, the data is sent by using the command packet in the 

RECEIPT mode.) 

[Example] 

[STX] 01H 23H deH Y 10H X 01H 00H 03H ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789 

No. of labels to be issued: 3 

Transmissive sensor designated, 

No status response made 

Form No.: 1 

Flag (Middle block) 

Mode (Fixed as “Y”: Indicates the RECEIPT mode.) 

Packet length (deH = 222 bytes) 

Printer ID (0123H) 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789 [CRC] [CRC] 

[STX] 01H 23H 57H Y 01H 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789 

ABCDEFGHIJKL [CRC] [CRC] 

Flag (Middle block) 

Packet length (57H = 87 bytes) 

6-37


6.5.10 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (QR Code) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm), nn, o, p [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 99 



bbbb: 

cccc: 


Fixed as 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm) 




T: QR code 

e: Designation of error correction level 





ff: 

1-cell width 


g: Selection of mode 

M: Manual mode 

A: Automatic mode 


0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

Mi: 

Kj: 

Selection of model 

(If this parameter is omitted, Model 1 is automatically selected.) 

i = 1: Model 1 

2: Model 2 

Mask number 

(If this parameter is omitted, the number is automatically set.) 

i = 0 to 7: Mask number 0 to 7 

8: No mask 

Jkkllmm: Connection setting (No connection if this parameter is omitted.) 

kk = 01 to 16: Value indicating which divided code is connected. 

ll = 01 to 16: Number of divided codes 

mm = 00 to FF: A value for all data to be printed, to which XOR is applied in 

units of bytes (Not divided) 

6-38


nn: 

Data length 

00 to 99 

NOTES: 

1. A two-digit value can be entered. 


sent by the Data Print Command. It corresponds for up to 2000 

digits. 

o: Data code 


p: Data code 


6-39


6.5.11 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Data Matrix) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn), ooo, p, q [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 99 



bbbb: 

cccc: 







ee: 

ff: 

gg: 

ECC type 

00: ECC000 

05: ECC050 

08: ECC080 

10: ECC100 

14: ECC140 

20: ECC200 

1-cell width 


Format ID 








0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

6-40


Ciiijjj: 

No. of cells (If this parameter is omitted, it is automatically set.) 

iii: No. of cells in the X direction 000 to 144 

jjj: No. of cells in the Y direction 000 to 144 

NOTE: Cell setting varies according to the ECC type. 

No. of cells to be 

designated 

ECC000 to ECC140 

Odd numbers only 

ECC200 

Even numbers only 

Min./Max. No. of cells 9 × 9 to 49 × 49 10 × 10 to 144 × 144 

Rectangular code None 18 × 8 

32 × 8 

26 × 12 

36 × 12 

36 × 16 

48 × 16 

• When this parameter is omitted, the number of cells is automatically set. Also, 

when data except for the above values is designated for Nos. of cells in the X 

and Y directions, the number of cells is automatically set. 

Jkkllmmmnnn: Connection setting 

(Omissible: No connection if this parameter is omitted) 

kk: Code number 01 to 16 

ll: No. of divided codes 01 to 16 

mmm: ID number 1 001 to 254 

nnn: ID number 2 001 to 254 

NOTE: It is effective only when ECC200 is selected. 

ooo: 

Data length 

000 to 100 

NOTES: 

1. “00 to 99” indicated in 2 digits, is also available. 


sent by the Data Print Command (data which is delimited by 

[LF].) 


sent by the Data Print Command. It corresponds for up to 2000 

digits. 

p: Data code 


q: Reserved area 

0: Fixed value 

6-41


6.5.12 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MircoPDF417) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii, jjj, k, l [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 99 



bbbb: 

cccc: 






X: MicroPDF417 (Two-dimensional code) 

ee: 

ff: 

gg: 






01 to 38 


0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

iiii: 

jjj: 

Bar height 


Data length 

000 to 100 

NOTES: 

1. “00 to 99” indicated in 2 digits, is also available. 

2. When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the data sent 

by the Data Print Command (data which is delimited by [LF].) 


by the Data Print Command. It corresponds for up to 366 digits. 

k: Data code 


l: Reserved area 


6-42


6.5.13 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Maxicode) [ESC] XB 

Function 

Format 



[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e (, Jffgg) (, Zh), iii, j, k [LF] [NUL] 


00 to 99 



bbbb: 

cccc: 






Z: Maxicode 

e: Mode selection 

2: Mode 2 

3: Mode 3 

4: Mode 4 

6: Mode 6 

Jffgg: 

iii: 

Zh: 

Connection setting (Omissible. If omitted, no connection is made.) 

ff: Code number 01 to 08 

gg: No. of divided codes 01 to 08 

Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block (Omissible. If omitted, the 

Zipper block and Contrast block 

are not attached.) 

h: 0: No attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block 

1: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block 

2: Attachment of Zipper block 

3: Attachment of Contrast block 

Data length 

000 to 100 

NOTES: 1. “00 to 99” indicated in 2 digits, is also available. 


by the Data Print Command (data which is delimited by [LF].) 

j: Data code 


k: Reserved area 


6-43


Explanation 

(1) Bar code/two-dimensional code No. 


bar code/two-dimensional code No. (The format of bar code/two-dimensional 

code Nos. 00 and 01 is linked to the first and second data, respectively. In the 

same order, the format is linked to the data.) Therefore, the Nos. of the bit map 

font character string, the outline font character string, and the bar code/twodimensional 

code, should be consecutive, starting from 00 (in ascending order). 

The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font character string 

field, the outline font character string field, and the bar code/two-dimensional code 

field. 



0 X 

Y 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 

Label 

Backing paper 

Effective 

print length 


coordinates 


(3) Type of check digit 

The check digit is automatically attached according to the type designation as 

shown below. 

Bar code 

type 

C/D type 

NW7, CODE39, 

Interleaved 2 of 5 

1 Without attaching check 

digit 

JAN8/EAN8, 

JAN13/EAN13 

No designation 

3 No designation Auto attachment of 

Modulus 10 

EAN128, 

CODE128 

No designation 

Auto 

attachment of 

PSEUDO103 

6-44


(4) Rotational angles of a bar code 

Origin 

Origin 

Origin 

Origin 

0° 90° 180° 270° 

NOTE: 

If a bar code is rotated at 90° or 270°, the print density may become lower 

in relation to the bar height. A bar code with a height of 14 mm or less 

should be used. When a bar code with a height of over 14 mm is used, 

the print quality is not guaranteed. 


Rotational angle of a two-dimensional code 

0° 90° 180° 270° 


Height of 

bar code 

4 9 4 0 

0 4 5 8 

Height of 

guard bar 


Numerals are provided under bars depending on the parameter for numerals 

under bars. Standard fonts are used. 

(7) Since the start/stop codes are not automatically attached, it should be included in 

the data to be sent. If the start/stop codes are not attached to data for CODE39 or 

NW7, the bar code is not drawn. 

(8) When Interleaved 2 of 5 is selected and the number of data length digits is odd, 0 is 

automatically added to the beginning of the data, to change the number of data 

length digits to even. 

6-45


(9) Explanation for QR code 

c Error correction level 

The QR code contains functions to detect and correct an error. If one of the data 

characters is damaged, the information can be restored when this code is read. 

There are 4 levels that can be designated. The level should be specified according to 

usage. The general correction ability is as follows. 

Level 

Error correction ability 

Overhead by correcting 

an error 

High density level Low 7% 

Standard level 15% 

Reliability level 25% 

High reliability level High 30% 

d 1-cell width 

1-cell width 

1-cell width 

e Selection of mode 

All codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji can be used in one QR code. 

Manual mode or automatic mode can be selected to perform the operation. 

f Selection of model 

Model 1: 

Model 2: 

Original specification 

Extended specification which enhances the function of position correction 

and can contain a large amount of data. 

g Mask number 

To be sure the QR code is read, it is preferable that white and black modules are 

arranged in this symbol in a balanced manner. This prevents the bit pattern 

“1011101”, which is characteristically seen in the position detecting pattern, from 

appearing in the symbol as much as possible. 

The mask number is 0 to 7. The pattern is determined by placing each masking 

pattern for the mask number upon the module pattern. When the mask number is set 

to 8, masking is not performed. When the parameter is omitted, the most appropriate 

mask number is automatically selected to perform masking. 

6-46


h Connection setting 

For QR code, data can be divided into several codes. Even though there is only a 

narrow print space, the code can be entered in the space by dividing the code. The 

data can be divided into a max. of 16 codes. Parity data is obtained by XORing all 

input data in units of bytes before dividing. The input data is calculated based on shift 

JIS for Kanji, or on JIS 8 for others. Examples are shown below: 

“0123456789 ” is divided into “0123”, “4567”, and “89 ”. 



Code No. 3 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 84 Data “89 ” 

* The parity data is the XORed value for “0123456789 ”. 

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 93 FA 96 7B = 85 

Note 

When the QR code is printed, note the setting for the coordinates positions. If the 

specified coordinates are close to the maximum effective print length, the QR code may 

not be included within the maximum effective print length, depending on the 1-cell width 

or the data count. If the QR code is not included within the maximum effective print 

width, one part of the printed QR code may be missing. Be sure to check to see if the 

QR code is included within the effective print length. 

(For example, when the maximum effective print length is 97 mm, if the Y-coordinate of 

the QR code is set to 90 mm, one part of the printed QR code may be missing, 

depending on the QR code size. 

6-47



The PDF417 contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error 

correcting code word and restore normal data. The security level should be 

designated according to usage to perform the error correction function. 



code words 

Level 0 0 

Level 1 Low 

2 

Level 2 6 

Level 3 14 

Level 4 30 

Level 5 62 

Level 6 126 

Level 7 High 

254 

Level 8 510 


The number of lines is variable in the PDF417. The line length (No. of data 

strings) is also variable. Therefore, a symbol can be created in a form that can be 

easily printed, by changing the proportion of the height and width. 

The number of columns (data strings) is variable between 1 and 30. 

If a small value for the number of columns is set when the data is large and the 

security level is high, drawing may not be performed. This is because the number 

of lines exceeds 90 when the number of columns becomes small. If the number 

of lines exceeds 90, a label is issued without being printed. 

(When the PDF417 is used, the number of lines of symbols is limited from 3 to 

90.) 

Example 

Origin of 

coordinates 

(0, 0) 


Effective 

print length 

(5 mm, 18 mm) 

Bar code No. 00 

NW7 

10 mm 

Label 

Backing paper 

[ESC] XB00 ; 0050, 0180, 4, 1, 02, 02, 05, 05, 02, 0, 0100, 0, 07, 1, 0 [LF] [NUL] 

6-48



6.6.1 DATA PRINT COMMAND [ESC] X 

Function 

Format 

Draws or prints the data. 


Xabcddd --- eee --- nnn --- 


[ESC] Xabcddd --- eee --- nnn --- [NUL] 

Term a: Form No. 

01H to 14H (1 to 20) 

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

Form No. (Bit 0 to Bit 6) 01H to 14H (1 to 20) 

Reprint key enabled or disabled (Bit 7) 

Selection of the reprint key function 

0: Enabled 

1: Disabled 

When the form No. is 81H to 8AH (1 to 10) and if an error occurs during 

printing, the reprint key will be enabled until a label is successfully issued. 

When the form No. is 8BH to 94H (11 to 20), the reprint key will be disabled if 

an error occurs during printing. 

b: Sensor designation and ACK (IrDA: TEC Protocol) /status transmission (IrDA: 

IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth) to notify the issue end 

00H: Transmissive sensor, No ACK/status transmission 

01H: Transmissive sensor, ACK/status transmission 

10H: Reflective sensor, No ACK/status transmission 

11H: Reflective sensor, ACK/status transmission 

20H: No sensor designation, No ACK/status transmission 

21H: No sensor designation, ACK/status transmission 

c: No. of labels to be issued 

01H to FFH (1 to 255) 

In the strip issue mode, one label is issued. If the number of labels is 

designated, it will be ignored. 

ddd ---: Data of character/bar code/2-D code No. 00 

eee ---: Data of character/bar code/2-D code No. 01 

nnn ---: Data of character/bar code/2-D code No. nn 

When a delimiter is required, it 

should be added to the end of 

data. (Refer to “Explanation”.) 

6-49


Explanation 

(1) When the printer receives this command, the following operations will be 

performed. 

c The printer clears the drawing buffer. 

d The printer links the form to the data. 

e The printer draws the data in the drawing buffer. 

f The printer draws the data if invocation of graphics is set in the form. 

g The printer sets the print density/position fine adjustment values stored in the 

form. 

h The printer starts printing 

(2) Data is indicated in JIS 8 code or packed BCD code. The type of data code is set 

by the Bit Map Font Field Command, the Outline Font Field Command, or the Bar 

Code/Two-dimensional Code Format Command. 

(3) When the length and the data code set by the Bit Map Font Field Command, the 

Outline Font Field Command, or the Bar Code/Two-dimensional Code Format 

Command is “00” and JIS 8 code, respectively, the delimiter [LF] (0AH) should be 

entered at the end of the field data. When the packed BCD is used as the data 

code, the delimiter “F” (4 bits) should be entered at the end of the field data. When 

the data length stored in the form is anything other than “00”, a delimiter such as 

[LF] or “F” should not be attached, since the length of the data is linked. 

(4) If the length of the data corresponding to one field (including a delimiter) is an odd 

number of digits when the packed BCD code is used, the last 4 bits of the final data 

in the field should be “0”. 

(5) When there is data which does not match the type of bar code/two-dimensional 

code in the data string for the bar code/two-dimensional code, the bar code/twodimensional 

code is not drawn. When the bar code/two-dimensional code digit is 

fixed, and the type of bar code/two-dimensional code does not match the number of 

the data digit, the bar code/two-dimensional code is not drawn. 

(6) If an error occurs while printing two or more labels, the printer stops printing, lights 

up the LED, discards the remaining data, and reverts to a wait state for a 

command. 

(7) If the form which corresponds to the form No. designated is not stored, a syntax 

error will occur. 

(8) When the form No. is other than 01H to 14H, the Data Print Command is 

discarded. 

(9) When the number of labels to be printed is other than 01H to FFH, a syntax error 

will occur. 

(10) If the battery capacity becomes low while printing two or more labels, the printer 

may stop after issuing every label (for Max. 3 seconds). 

6-50


(11) Automatic status transmission (IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN) 

When the status response is designated, the printer automatically sends the printer 

status and the battery status after issuing labels. 




Printer ID ............2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low) 

Printer status ......Printer status is indicated in 1-byte data. 












10H: Normal issue end 

0DH: Normal issue end + Label end 

This is a state when the printer runs out of labels, after 

the effective print length is printed. 

Battery status...........The battery charge status is indicated in 5 levels. 


02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V 

(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 20 or less) 

03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V 


04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V 




* The remaining number of printable labels may vary according to 

the contents to be printed and the ambient environment. 

(12) If an error occurs when 99% of print data has been printed, pressing the FEED key 

after clearing the error causes the printer to reprint, even when the restart key is set 

to disabled and the form number is selected from 1 to 10. 

(13) If an error occurs before printing, the printer will not reprint by pressing the FEED 

key after clearing the error, when the restart key is set to disabled and the form 

number is selected from 11 to 20. 

(14) In case of “normal issue end + label end”, pressing the FEED key after clearing the 

error causes the printer to reprint even when the restart key is set to disabled and 

the form number is selected from 1 to 10. 

6-51


(15) When the sensor is specified, even if a gap or a black mark is detected within less 

than 90% of the effective print length specified by the Label Size Set Command, it 

is ignored. 

However, this is not applicable when the programmed media pitch is less than 

40mm. When this media is used and a gap or a black mark is detected within less 

than 90% of the effective print length, the detected gap or black mark will be 

effective. As a result, printing will stop even if it is halfway. 

• The definition of packed BCD code 

Code Character string Bar code 

Standard/ 

EAN8/13 

Bold Price Others 

Presentation 

ITF 

EAN128 MIS 

NW7 CODE39 CODE128 

0000 (0) 

~ 1001 (9) 

“0” ~ “9” 

1010 (A) Reserved “-“ “$” “£” Reserved “a” “*” “ ” 

1011 (B) Reserved Reserved Reserved “p” Reserved “b” “-” “ ” 

1100 (C) “.” Reserved “.” “.” Reserved “c” “.” “ ” 

1101 (D) “ ” “ ” “ ” “ ” Reserved “d” “ ” “ ” 

1110 (E) Reserved 

1111 (F) Delimiter 

* E (H) is reserved for expansion. F (H) is used as the delimiter for each field in the 

Data Print Command (only when the data length and the data code are “00” and 

“Packed BCD code”, respectively). 

[Example] Bar code data = “a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 d” 

[A1H] [23H] [45H] [67H] [89H] [0DH] 

a1 23 45 67 89 0d 

6-52


z When the manual mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code 

• Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode 



• Binary mode 



(4 digits) 


• Mixed mode 

Data “,” (comma) Data “,” (comma) Data 

The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji. 

Since data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used is 

designated when the mode is selected. 




$ % * + - . / : 


K Kanji Shift JIS 

If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code. 

z When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code. 


c How to send the control code data 

NUL (00H) = > @ (3EH, 40H) 

SOH (01H) = > A (3EH, 41H) 

STX (02H) = > B (3EH, 42H) 

GS (1DH) = > ] (3EH, 5DH) 

RS (1EH) = > ^ (3EH, 5EH) 

US (1FH) = > _ (3EH, 5FH) 

d How to send the special codes 

> (3EH) = > 0 (3EH, 30H) 

6-53


[Transfer code] 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 












B VT ESC + ; K [ k { 

C FF FS , < L \ l | 

D CR GS - = M ] m } 

E SO RS • > N ^ n ~ 


* The shaded parts are Japanese. 

They are omitted here. 

When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command, FFH data cannot be 

used. It is available when the manual mode is selected. 

Examples of data designation for QR code 

c Alphanumeric mode: ABC123 

A A B C 1 2 3 



d Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H 

B 0 0 0 6 > A > C > E 




e Mixed mode 

Numeric mode : 123456 

Kanji mode : Kanji data 

Binary mode : a i u e o 

Alphanumeric mode : ABC 

N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a i u e o , A A B C 

Data to be Data to be No. of Data to be printed Data to be 

printed 

printed data strings 

printed 


f Automatic mode 

When the data above (e) is designated in automatic mode: 

1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a i u e o A B C 


6-54


6.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO FORMAT 

6.7.1 FLASH MEMORY STORAGE AREA FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1 

Function 

Format 

Formats (Initializes) the form storage area in flash memory. 

[ESC] J1; a [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Format (Initialization) designation 

A: Form storage area 

B: Writable character storage area 

C: Graphic storage area 

D: All storage areas (Form, Writable character, Graphic) 

Explanation 

Refer to 

(1) When the storage area in flash ROM becomes full, the old data is automatically 

deleted and only the newest data is left. 

Only the form storage area in flash ROM can be forcefully cleared by this 

command. However, if this command is sent, all data of the stored forms, including 

the newest data, is deleted (initialized). 

Form Store Start Command ([ESC] XO) 

6-55


6.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO WRITABLE CHARACTERS 

6.8.1 WRITABLE CHARACTER DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] XD 

Function 

Format 

Stores writable characters and logos into flash memory. 

[ESC] XD ; aa, bbb --- bbb [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Writable character code 

FF40H to FF71H 

bbb---bbb: 

Writable character data (Fixed as 72 bytes) 

Explanation 


1 00H 2 60H 3 00H 

Graphic 

height 

24 dots 

4 00H 5 70H 6 00H 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

67 EFH 68 80H 69 00H 

70 3EH 71 00H 72 00H 


(1) The writable character data should be separated into units of 8 dots and sent in the 

above order (1 to 72). 

(2) The writable character data is 00H to FFH. 

(3) The number of dots of a writable character width and a writable character height 

are fixed as 24 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as data 0. 72-byte data 

should be sent. 

(4) Max. 50 types of writable character data can be stored. The writable character data 

is backed up in memory (even if the power is turned off). 

(5) Writable character data is assigned from FF40H to FF71H. Therefore, to read the 

code, the code (2 bytes) which was stored by this command should be designated. 

(6) A new writable character can be stored in codes which have been stored in an 

already existing code. 

6-56


Example 


Graphic 

height 

24 dots 


[ESC]XD;, 

[00H][60H][00H][00H][70H][00H][00H][78H][00H] 

[00H][7CH][00H][00H][6EH][00H][00H][67H][00H] 

[00H][63H][80H][00H][61H][80H][00H][61H][C0H] 

[00H][60H][C0H][00H][61H][C0H][00H][61H][80H] 

[00H][63H][80H][00H][67H][C0H][00H][66H][00H] 

[0FH][60H][00H][0EH][60H][00H][3FH][E0H][00H] 

[7FH][FEH][00H][FFH][E0H][00H][FFH][C0H][00H] 

[FFH][C0H][00H][EFH][80H][00H][3EH][00H][00H] 

[LF][NUL] 

6-57



6.9.1 GRAPHIC DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] SG 

Function 

Format 

Stores the graphic data on the printer. 

[ESC] SG ; a, bbbb, cccc, ddd --- ddd [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Graphic No. 

1 to 2 

bbbb: 

cccc: 

ddd --- ddd: 

No. of graphic width dots to be stored 


No. of graphic height dots to be stored 


Graphic data 

Explanation 


1 00H 2 60H 3 00H 

Graphic 

height 

22 dots 

4 00H 5 70H 6 00H 

• 

• 

• 

• 

67 EFH 68 80H 69 00H 

70 3EH 71 00H 72 00H 

8 8 

8 

(1) The graphic data should be separated into units of 8 dots and sent in the above 

order (1 to 72). 


(3) The minimum unit of a graphic width is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as 

data 0. 

(4) The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted must be as follows; 

The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted = {(No. of graphic width dots + 

7)/8} × No. of graphic height dots 


6-58


Example 


Graphic 

height 

22 dots 

[ESC]SG;1,0019,0024, 

[00H][60H][00H][00H][70H][00H][00H][78H][00H] 

[00H][7CH][00H][00H][6EH][00H][00H][67H][00H] 

[00H][63H][80H][00H][61H][80H][00H][61H][C0H] 

[00H][60H][C0H][00H][61H][C0H][00H][61H][80H] 

[00H][63H][80H][00H][67H][C0H][00H][66H][00H] 




[LF][NUL] 

6-59


6.9.2 GRAPHIC FIELD COMMAND [ESC] N 

Function 

Format 

Sets how the graphic data is to be printed on the label. 

[ESC] N ; a, bbbb, cccc [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Graphic No. to be invoked and drawn 

1 to 2 

bbbb: 

cccc: 

Print origin of X-coordinate of graphic data 


Print origin of Y-coordinate of graphic data 


Explanation 

(1) If the Graphic Field Command is stored in a form, like the Bit Map Font Field 

Command, the Outline Font Field Command, or the Bar Code/Two-dimensional 

Code Format Command, the graphic data is automatically drawn, when the stored 

form is invoked by the Data Print Command. 

(2) When no graphic data has been stored, the printer does not print any graphics even 

if a graphic data number is specified by the Graphic Field Command. 

0 X 

Y 


Origin of coordinates 

(0, 0) 


coordinates 

Width of the graphic 

Effective 

print length 

Height of 

the graphic 


6-60


6.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO PC COMMAND SAVING 

6.10.1 FORM STORE START COMMAND [ESC] XO 

Function 

Format 

Declares the start of form storage. 

[ESC] XO ; aa, b [LF] [NUL] 

Term aa: Form No. 

01 to 20 

b: Form version No. 

0 to 9 (It is not stored when “0” is designated) 

Notes 

(1) Max. 20 types can be stored. However, since the memory capacity is limited, the 

maximum number may vary depending on the form size to be stored. 

(2) The data which is stored most recently is the newest in spite of the version No. 

(3) When the form number which has been stored is stored again, the new form can be 

stored if the Form Store Start Command ([ESC] XO) is sent. However, memory is 

used every time a form is stored again. 

(4) Until the Form Store Terminate Command ([ESC] XP) is received after the Form 

Store Start Command ([ESC] XO) is received, any command other than below is 

not stored and is ignored. 

• Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D) 

• Print Density Fine Adjust Command ([ESC] AY) 

• Position Fine Adjust Command ([ESC] AX) 

• Bit Map Font Field Command ([ESC] PC) 

• Outline Font Field Command ([ESC] PV) 

• Bar Code/Two-dimensional Code Format Command ([ESC] XB) 

• Graphic Field Command ([ESC] N) 

• Line Format Command ([ESC] LC) 

(5) If the Form Store Start Command is not sent, the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] 

D), the Bit Map Font Field Command ([ESC] PC), the Outline Font Field Command 

([ESC] PV), the Bar Code/Two-dimensional Code Format Command ([ESC] XB), 

and the Graphic Field Command ([ESC] N) are ignored and discarded. 

After the Form Store Start Command is sent, the Label Size Set Command should 

be sent before each field command, the Print Density Fine Adjust Command, or the 

Position Fine Adjust Command is sent. 

(6) When there is no free space in the form storage area in flash ROM because of 

storing a form, this area is automatically initialized. However, the latest version of 

each form is held. 

Refer to 

Form Store Terminate Command ([ESC] XP) 

Example To start storing version 3 of form No. 2. 

[ESC] XO ; 02, 3 [LF] [NUL] 

6-61


6.10.2 FORM STORE TERMINATE COMMAND [ESC] XP 

Function 

Format 

Note 

Refer to 

Declares the termination of form storage. 


(1) If the Form Store Start Command ([ESC] XO) is not previously received when this 

command is received, this command is ignored. 

Form Store Start Command ([ESC] XO) 

6-62



6.11.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] WR, [ESC] @ 

Function 

Format 

Explanation 



[ESC] @ 




(3) The host should not send the next command within 5 second after sending the 

Initialize Command (or after the printer completes printing if receiving the Initialize 

Command during printing). In IrDA: TEC Protocol, if ACK/status transmission is 

specified by the Issue Command, the printer returns an ACK, which indicates the 

command process end, to the EOT after the printer is initialized. In RS-232C, when 

the status response is specified, the printer returns the status (10H). After this 

status is received, the next command may be sent. In IrDA: IrCOMM, Bluetooh, or 

Wireless LAN, the printer does not return the status. 

(4) To use IrDA interface for sending this command to the printer, only this command 

should be sent. After the command is sent, the link should be terminated. Even if 

the host does not terminate the link, the printer performs the termination process. 




6-63



6.12.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS, [ESC] v 

Function 

Format 

Explanation 




[ESC] v 

When receiving this command, the printer sends the printer status and battery status to 

the host. 

• For IrDA: TEC Protocol: Data to be sent (Fixed as 27 bytes) 


02H xxH xxH V01 V02 ········· V20 xxH xxH xxH xxH 

• For IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN: Data to be sent (Fixed as 5 

bytes) 



Printer ID...............2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low) 

Printer status.........Printer status is indicated in 1-byte data. 















(10H: Normal termination): A response sent from the printer only 

when the automatic status transmission 

is designated. 

NOTE: This is a state when the printer runs out of labels, after 


6-64




02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V 


03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V 


04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V 






CRC.........................2-byte hex data (in order from Low to High) 

6-65



Function 

Format 

Explanation 






L A B E L SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP 

02H 4CH 41H 42H 45H 4CH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH 


STX 

Mode information (16 bytes) 

L A B E L SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP 

02H 4CH 41H 42H 45H 4CH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 

The above is an example where the message is received in the LABEL mode. In addition, the message 

of “TPCL-LE”, “TPCL-LE1”, “RECEIPT”, or “RECEIPT1” is returned. 

6-66




Function 

Format 

Explanation 

Calls up the device address of the Bluetooth interface or MAC address of the wireless 

LAN interface connected to the printer. 



wireless LAN. On receiving this command, the printer returns the Bluetooth device 

address or MAC address with the complenents of the following information field. 

When using the IrDA: TEC Protocol, the following information field is placed in the 

information frame and sent in packets. 




[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth, wireless LAN 

is used] 

STX 

02H 

Bluetooth device address 

12 bytes 

Example 



information. 


[30H] [30H] [30H] [31H] [63H] [63H] [66H] [30H] [30H] [34H] [32H] [62H] 

0 0 0 1 c c f 0 0 4 2 b 

6-67

7. RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS) 



This chapter describes details on the interface commands for the RECEIPT and RECEIPT1 modes of 

the print mode. If operations are the same between the RECEIPT mode and the RECEIPT1 mode, 

only “RECEIPT mode” is described in explanations, and the RECEIPT1 mode is included. If 

operations are different between them, the RECEIPT mode (Mode = 1 or 3) or the RECEIPT1 mode 

(Mode = 2) is specified. In the RECEIPT mode, only batch issues are supported. 


Format 

Command 



[ESC]M 



TPCL-LE. 

[ESC]3 Line Feed Length Set Command No 

[ESC]a Print Position Align Command No 

[ESC]L Line Format Command No 

[ESC]K Font Type Command No 

[ESC]KV Outline Font Format Command No 

[GS]k Bar Code/Two-Dimensional Code Print Command No 

[ESC]! Character Magnification Command No 

[GS]W Bar Code Horizontal Size Command No 

[GS]h Bar Code Height Command No 

[GS]Hn Numerals Under Bars Command No 

[GS]s Security Level Command No 

[GS]c No. of Columns (Strings) Command No 

[ESC]W Print Width Command No 

[ESC]H Horizontal Print Position Command No 

[ESC]O Horizontal Offset Position Command No 

[ESC]R Character Rotate Command No 

[GS]q Error Correction Level Set Command No 

[GS]r QR Code Model Set Command No 

[LF] Print Line Feed Command No 

[ESC]B Back Feed Omission Command No 

[ESC]SG Graphic Data Store Command Yes 

[GS]/ Graphic Print Command No 

[ESC]WR 

[ESC]@ 

Initialize Command 


(TEC Protocol) or RS-232C 

[ESC]WS Status Request Command --- 

[ESC]FM 

[ESC]v 


[ESC]WV Version Information Acquire Command --- 


[GS]: Macro Definition Command No 

[GS]^ Macro Execute Command No 

7-1




ESC 

Command 

GS 

Command 

ESC Command LF NUL 


Function 

Format 

Term 

Initial value 

Explanation 

Refer to 


Shows the format of the command 


• “n” indicates a parameter item. 

• Brackets and parentheses are used only in coding, and must not be 

transmitted in practice. 

• Other symbols must always be inserted at the designated positions before 

being transmitted. 


Indicates the initial value of the parameter (when turning the power on, or 

changing the print mode to the RECEIPT mode.) 



7-2



(1) The host should send the print data and the Print Line Feed Command for printing. Commands 

other than these should be sent as required. 

(2) Character type 

Only standard characters are used when printing the data. 

[Ex] 1 2 3 4 5 A B C D E 

[31H] [32H] [33H] [34H] [35H] [41H] [42H] [43H] [44H] [45H] 

1 2 3 4 5 A B C D E 

(3) While the RECEIPT mode is selected, the print density fine adjustment cannot be performed, 

and the writable character data cannot be stored. To perform the print density fine adjustment, 

or to store the writable character data, change the print mode from the RECEIPT mode to the 

LABEL or the TPCL-LE mode. 

(4) [FEED] switch 

In the RECEIPT mode, if the [FEED] switch is pressed, the receipt is not printed again. A 20- 

mm feed is performed. To cut a receipt using the tear bar after issuing it, a receipt can be fed to 

the position at which the receipt can be easily cut by pressing the [FEED] switch. 

(5) Error processing 

[RECEIPT mode] 

When an error occurs while the printer is issuing a receipt, the LED blinks. The printer 

discards all data and commands which have been received, and enters a wait state for a 

command. Therefore, if an error occurs, the print data or a command should be sent again 

after clearing the error. 

[RECEIPT1 mode] 

After the label end error or the cover open error is cleared, the printer automatically continues 

printing the data which has been received before the error occurred. 

(6) Status response 

In the RECEIPT mode, the printer does not automatically send a status indicating the normal 

end. Therefore, the host should send the Status Request Command to check the printer status. 

However, when the Mode Select Command or the Graphic Command is sent, or if an error 

occurs, the printer sends the status. In IrDA: IrCOMM communications, only when the status 

transmission is specified, the printer sends the status. 

(7) Initial values 

When the power is turned on or when RECEIPT mode or RECEIPT1 mode is selected, the initial 

values will be set. The initial values are also set when the mode is switched between RECEIPT 

mode and RECEIPT1 mode, or when the mode is switched from RECEIPT mode to RECEIPT 

mode, or from RECEIPT1 mode to RECEIPT1 mode. 

7-3




Function 

Format 




7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 




1: Performed 








42H TPCL-LE1 Continues printing (* Firmware V1.5 or greater) 







Explanation 


















LABEL modes. 

7-4



FEED button. 

Notes 



off). 




LABEL mode (0): The previously backed up sensor is designated. 

TPCL-LE mode (A): The previously backed up sensor is designated. 

TPCL-LE1 mode (B): The previously backed up sensor is designated. 

RECEIPT mode (1 or 3): No sensor is designated. 

RECEIPT1 mode (2): No sensor is designated. 










(7) As the print position detection feed parameter is effective only when changing the 

print mode to LABEL, this parameter status will be ignored when changing the 

mode to TPCL-LE. 















performed. 





7-5


Normal mode 










TPCL-LE mode 




is canceled. 


LABEL mode 




RECEIPT mode 




RECEIPT1 mode 



TCP-LE1 mode 





7-6



7.4.1 LINE FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] 3 

Function 

Format 

Sets the length of the line feed (the number of dots) which is performed by the Print Line 

Feed Command ([LF]). 

[ESC] 3n 

Term n: Length of line feed (1 byte) 

00H to FFH (0 to 255 dots) 

Initial value n: 1EH (30 dots) 

Explanation 

(1) When the power is turned on or the printer enters the RECEIPT mode, the initial 

value is 30 dots 

(2) When the specified length of the line feed is larger than the character on the next 

line or the height of the bar code plus 6 dots, a line feed with the specified length is 

performed. 

(3) When the specified length of the line feed is smaller than the character on the next 

line or the height of the bar code plus 6 dots, the specified length of the line feed is 

ignored, and a line feed with the height of the character or the bar code to be 

printed is performed. 


Initial value: 

30 dots 

When the print height 

is larger than the set 

value, a line feed with 

the print height is 

performed. 

A B C 

D E F 

* 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 * 

ABC [LF] 

DEF [LF] 

[GS] k3 *87654321* [NUL] [LF] 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 

1234567890 [LF] 

1 2 3 A B C 

123 [ESC] ! ABC [LF] 

Effective print width (Width of head) 

Width of receipt 

Refer to 

Print Line Feed Command ([LF]) 

7-7


7.4.2 PRINT POSITION ALIGN COMMAND [ESC] a 

Function 

Format 

Aligns the print position on the left, the right, or at the center. 

[ESC] an 

Term n: Alignment 

0: Left 

1: Center 

2: Right 

Initial value n: 0 (Left) 

Explanation 

(1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error will occur. 

(2) This command is effective for all lines which are printed after the command is 

received. 

(3) For CODE128 and EAN128, the print position should be aligned on the left. 


Alignment : Left 

(Initial value) 

ABC 

DEF 

ABC [LF] 

DEF [LF] 

Alignment : Center 

ABC 

[ESC] a1 ABC [LF] 

4 9 4 0 0 4 5 8 

[GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF] 

Alignment : Right 

ABC 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 

1234567890 [LF] 



7-8



7.5.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] L 

Function 

Format 

Specifies the line format and draws it. 

[ESC] Labbb 

Term a: Line width 


bbb: 

Line length 


Explanation 

(1) The print position of the line is shown below: 


[Enlarged view] 

100 dots 

3 dots 

Initial value: 000 dot 

ABC 

ABC [LF] 

Line 

DEF 

DEF [ESC] L3100 [LF] 

Left margin: 100 dots 

100 

ABC 

[ESC] H100 ABC [LF] 

[GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF] 

4 9 4 0 0 4 5 8 

Offset: 100 dots, 

Alignment: Center 

100 

ABC 

[ESC] C +100 [ESC] a1 ABC [LF] 

Alignment: Right 

Left margin: 0 dot, 

Alignment: Left 

456 

123 [ESC] a2 123 [LF] 

[ESC] H000 [ESC] a0 456 [LF] 



Note 

(1) If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing may 

become poor, or the printer may be reset. When a horizontal line is to be drawn, 

note the print ratio. 

7-9


7.5.2 FONT TYPE COMMAND [ESC] K 

Function 

Format 

Specifies the font used for printing. 

[ESC] Kn 

Initial value n: A: Standard character 

Term n: Font type 

A: Standard Character (12×24 dots) 

B: Bold Character (48×96 dots) 

C: Writable Character (24×24 dots) 

D: Price Font 1 (16×40 dots) 

E: Price Font 2 (32×48 dots) 

F: Time Roman (Bold) (21 point) 

G: Helvetica (Bold) (18 point) 

H: Letter Gothic (Medium) (14.3 point) 

I: Courier (Medium) (15 point) 

J: Presentation (Bold) (27 point) 

O: GOTHIC 725 Black (6 point) 

Explanation 


7-10


7.5.3 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] KV 

Function 

Format 

Initial value 

Sets the outline font. 

[ESC] KVabbbccc 

None 

Term a: Font type 

A: TEC Font 1 (Helvetica: Bold) 

B: TEC Font 1 (Helvetica: Bold, Proportional) 

bbb: 

ccc: 





Explanation 

(1) When “a”, “bbb”, and “ccc” are set to any value other than the above, a command 


7-11


7.5.4 BAR CODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE PRINT COMMAND [GS] k 

Function 

Format 

Prints the specified bar code/two-dimensional code. 

[GS] kn [NUL] 

Term n: Type of bar code/two-dimensional code 

0: JAN8/EAN8 9: CODE128 

2: Interleaved 2 of 5 N: EAN128 

3: CODE39 P: PDF417 

4: NW7 T: QR code 

5: JAN13/EAN13 

: Bar code/two-dimensional code data 

Explanation 


(2) When the type of bar code is JAN8, EAN8, JAN13, EAN13, EAN128, or CODE128, 

a check digit is automatically attached. 

(3) When the type of bar code is CODE39, NW7 or Interleaved 2 of 5, a check digit is 

not attached. When a CODE39 or NW7 is used, the start/stop codes are not 

attached. Therefore, the host should attach them to the data. 

(4) Characters or another bar code/two-dimensional code should not be printed on the 

same line including a PDF417. 

(5) For CODE128 and EAN128, only bar codes aligned on the left can be printed. 

(6) For QR code, the mode, the mask number, and the connection settings are as 

follows: Automatic mode, automatically-set mask number, no connection. 

(7) Characters or another bar code/two-dimensional code should not be printed on the 

same line as a QR code. 

7-12



A B C 

ABC [LF] 

* 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 * 

[GS] k3 *87654321* [NUL] [LF] 

4 9 4 0 0 4 5 8 

[GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF] 

Effective print width (width of head) 


Refer to Bar Code Horizontal Size Command ([GS] w) 

Bar Code Height Command ([GS] h) 

Numerals Under Bars Command ([GS] H) 

Security Level Command ([GS] s) 

No. of Columns (Strings) Command ([GS] c) 

Error Correction Level Set Command (for QR code) ([GS] q) 

QR Code Model Set Command ([GS] r) 

7-13


7.5.5 CHARACTER MAGNIFICATION COMMAND [ESC] ! 

Function 

Designates the magnification of the character to be printed. 

Format [ESC] !n 

Term n: Character magnification (1 byte) 

00H: 1 magnification (horizontal) × 1 magnification (vertical) 










Initial value n: 00H (1 magnification (horizontal) × 1 magnification (vertical)) 

Explanation 


(2) After this command is received, it is effective until the setting is changed again by 

the Character Magnification Command in spite of a line feed or printing. 


AB 

AB 

2×2 mag. 

2×1 mag. 

AB [ESC] ! AB [ESC] ! 

AB [ESC] ! AB [LF] 

1×2 mag. 

1×1 mag. (initial value) 



7-14


7.5.6 BAR CODE HORIZONTAL SIZE COMMAND [GS] w 

Function 

Format 

Sets the horizontal size of the bar code. For QR code, the 1-cell width is set. 

[GS] wn 

Term n: Horizontal size of the bar code (1 byte) 

02H to 05H 

Initial value n: 02H 

Explanation 


(2) The horizontal size designated by this command is as follows. (1 dot = 1/8 mm) 

[JAN8, EAN8, JAN13, EAN13, EAN128, CODE128] 

n 1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 


02H 2 4 6 8 

03H 3 6 9 12 

(Unit: dots) 

[PDF417] 

n 1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules 


02H 2 4 6 8 10 12 

03H 3 6 9 12 15 18 

(Unit: dots) 

[NW7, CODE39, Interleaved 2 of 5] 

n Narrow Wide Character-to- 

Bar Space Bar Space character space 

02H 2 2 5 5 2 

03H 2 2 6 6 2 

04H 3 3 8 8 3 

05H 3 3 9 9 3 

(Unit: dots) 

* The character-to-character space does not exist in the Interleaved 2 of 5. 

[QR code] 

n 1-cell size 

02H 2 

03H 3 

04H 4 

05H 5 

(Unit: dots) 

Refer to: Bar Code/Two-Dimensional Code Print Command ([GS] k) 

7-15


7.5.7 BAR CODE HEIGHT COMMAND [GS] h 

Function 

Format 

Sets the bar code height. 

[GS] hn 

Term n: Bar code height (1 byte) 

01H to FFH (1 to 255 dots) 

Initial value n: 68H (104 dots) 

Explanation 


* For the PDF417, the bar height for one row is set by this command. Note that the 

height of the whole bar code cannot be set by this command. The PDF417 can have 

the maximum of 90 rows. Therefore, if 16 or more dots are specified, the PDF417 

may not be able to be stored in the image buffer, since the PDF417 is too large. When 

the PDF417 cannot be stored in the image buffer, the printer’s operation is not 

guaranteed. 


32 dots 

* 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 * 

[GS] h [GS] k3*87654321* 

[NUL] [LF] 

64 dots 

* 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 * 

[GS] h [GS] k3*87654321* 

[NUL] [LF] 

96 dots 

* 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 * 

[GS] h [GS] k3*87654321* 

[NUL] [LF] 



Refer to Bar Code/Two-Dimensional Code Print Command ([GS] k) 

7-16


7.5.8 NUMERALS UNDER BARS COMMAND [GS] Hn 

Function 

Format 

Sets numerals under bars. 

[GS] Hn 

Term n: Selection to print numerals under bars 

0: Non-print 

1: Print (with EAN guard bar) 

2: Print (without EAN guard bar) 

Initial value n: 1: Print (with EAN guard bar) 

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error will occur. 

(2) For NW7, CODE39, and Interleaved 2 of 5, if “n” is set to “1” or “2”, printing is the 

same. 

(3) The length of the guard bar is fixed as 16 dots (2 mm). 


[GS] H0 [GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF] 

4 9 4 0 0 4 5 8 

[GS] H1 [GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF] 

4 9 4 0 0 4 5 8 

[GS] H2 [GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF] 




7-17


7.5.9 SECURITY LEVEL COMMAND [GS] s 

Function 

Format 

Sets the security level. 

[GS] sn 


Term n: Security level to be set 

00: Level 0 

01: Level 1 

02: Level 2 

03: Level 3 

04: Level 4 

05: Level 5 

06: Level 6 

07: Level 7 

08: Level 8 

Explanation 


(2) This command is effective for the PDF417 only. If this command is send for 

printing other bar code/two-dimensional codes, the command will be ignored. 


7-18


7.5.10 NO. OF COLUMNS (STRINGS) COMMAND [GS] c 

Function 

Format 

Sets the number of columns (strings). 

[GS] cn 


Term n: No. of columns (strings) 

01 to 30 

Explanation 

(1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above range, a command error will 

occur. 

(2) This command is effective for the PDF417 only. If this command is sent for printing 

other bar code/two-dimensional codes, the command will be ignored. 

Refer to: Bar Code/Two-Dimensional Code Print Command ([GS] k) 

7-19


7.5.11 PRINT WIDTH COMMAND [ESC] W 

Function 

Format 

Sets the print width. 

[ESC] Wnnn 

Initial value nnn: 384 

Term 

Explanation 

nnn: No. of dots for the print width matching the receipt width. 

216 ≤ nnn ≤ 384 (dots) 

(1) When “nnn” is set to any value other than the above range, a command error will 

occur. 

(2) The print width can be set, matching the receipt width. Using this command, the 

data can be printed properly at the position where the alignment (right or center) is 

specified. 

(3) If the printer receives this command while receiving one part of 1-line data, the 

printer prints the data which has been received before receiving this command, 

then sets the print width. However, printing of the line is not guaranteed. 

(4) If the data is not included in the specified print width, the excess data is not printed. 

7-20


7.5.12 HORIZONTAL PRINT POSITION COMMAND [ESC] H 

Function 

Format 

Initial value 

Term 

Explanation 

Sets the left margin of the line (space from the left edge). 

[ESC] Hnnn 

nnn: 000 dot 

nnn: No. of dots for the margin (space) from the left edge of the paper to the print start 

position (3 bytes) 

000 to 383 (dots) 

(1) When “nnn” is set to any value other than the above range, a command error will 

occur. 

(2) This command is effective for all lines to be printed after it is received, until this 

command is received again, the setting is initialized by the Mode Select Command, 

or the power is turned off. 

(3) When the alignment (left, right, center) is specified by the Position Align Command, 

the alignment is performed within the effective range excluding the left margin set 

by this command. 

(4) In the case that the left margin is set for printing character strings and bar codes, if 

the data is not included within one line excluding the left margin, the excess data 

may be printed in the left margin on the next line. Do not send the data which is not 

included within one line. 

(5) When this command is received while one part of 1-line data is being received, it 

becomes effective from the next line. 

(6) If the print start position specified by this command is on the right of the right end of 

the print width specified by the Print Width Command ([ESC] W), a command error 

will occur. 

7-21



Initial value: 000 dot ABC ABC [LF] 

DEF 

DEF [LF] 


100 

ABC 


[GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF] 

4 9 4 0 0 4 5 8 


ABC 



123 [ESC] a2 123 [LF] 



456 

[ESC] H000 [ESC] a0 456 [LF] 



7-22


7.5.13 HORIZONTAL OFFSET POSITION COMMAND [ESC] O 

Function 

Format 

Sets the left margin (space from the left edge) of only the line. 

[ESC] Oabbb 

Initial value abbb: +000 

Term a: Indicates whether the number of offset dots is increased or decreased 

+: Increased 

-: Decreased 

bbb: 

No. of offset dots from the position specified by [ESC] H 

-383 to +383 dots 

Explanation 

(1) When “a” or “bbb” is set to any value other than the above range, a command error 

will occur. 

(2) If other data is received after the horizontal offset position is specified again by this 

command even though the data has already been drawn on the line, it is printed at 

the position specified by this command. Therefore, it is printed over the already 

drawn data. 

(3) This command is effective until a line feed is performed. After a line feed is 

performed, printing is performed at the print start position specified by the 

Horizontal Print Position Command ([ESC] H). 

(4) If the print start position specified by this command is on the right of the right end of 

the print width specified by the Print Width Command ([ESC] W), a command error 

will occur. 

(5) If the print start position specified by this command is on the left of the print start 

position specified by the Horizontal Print Position Command ([ESC] H), or the left 

edge of the paper, a command error will occur. 

7-23



Initial value: 000 dot ABC ABC [LF] 

DEF 

DEF [LF] 


100 

ABC 


[GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF] 

4 9 4 0 0 4 5 8 

Offset: 100 dots, 


100 

ABC 

[ESC] C +100 [ESC] a1 ABC [LF] 




456 

123 [ESC] a2 123 [LF] 

[ESC] H000 [ESC] a0 456 [LF] 



7-24


7.5.14 CHARACTER ROTATE COMMAND [ESC] R 

Function 

Format 

Specifies the rotational angle of characters. 

[ESC] Rn 

Initial value n: 0 

Term n: Rotational angle of characters 

0: 0° 

1: 90° 

2: 180° 

3: 270° 

Explanation 


(2) The characters are rotated as shown below: 

0° 

90° 

180° 

270° 

Origin 

* When characters are rotated, they are not aligned to the reference line, because 

each font has a different parameter for the print position. If the character 

magnification is changed, they are not aligned to the reference line either. 

7-25


7.5.15 ERROR CORRECTION LEVEL SET COMMAND (For QR Code) [GS] q 

Function 

Format 

Sets the error correction level. 

[GS] qn 

Term n: Error correction level to be set 





Initial value n: M (Standard level) 

Explanation 


(2) This command is effective for the QR code only. If this command is set when 



7-26


7.5.16 QR CODE MODEL SET COMMAND [GS] r 

Function 

Format 

Sets the model of the QR code. 

[GS] rn 

Term n: Model to be set 

1: Model 1 

2: Model 2 

Initial value n: 1 (Model 1) 

Explanation 


(2) This command is effective for the QR code only. If this command is set when 



7-27



7.6.1 PRINT LINE FEED COMMAND [LF] 

Function 

Format 

Explanation 

Prints the received data and performs a line feed. 

[LF] 

(1) When the Print Line Feed Command is received without data to be printed, only the 

length of the line feed which has been set is performed. 

(2) In the RECEIPT mode, the printer is operated without designating the sensor. 

(3) Since the printer does not perform a line feed automatically, be sure to send the 

Print Line Feed Command for each data which can be included within one line. If 

data which is not included within one line is received, characters cannot be printed 

in the proper position. 


ABC 

ABC [LF] 

[LF] 

ABC 

[ESC] ! ABC [LF] 

[LF] 

[LF] 

* 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 * 

[GS] k3*87654321* [NUL] [LF] 

[LF] 



Refer to Line Feed Length Set Command ([ESC] 3) 

7-28


7.6.2 BACK FEED OMISSION COMMAND [ESC]B 

(Firmware V1.3 or greater) 

Function 

Format 

Explanation 

Omits a back feed before printing. 

[ESC]B 

(1) Usually, in the RECEIPT mode, the printer feeds for about 3-mm backward before 

starting to print or before printing after a pause. This is intended to adjust the print 

start position (line feed), however, the first back feed may be unnecessary 

depending on the print layout. Also, a back feed can reduce the throughput. So, 

the first back feed can be omitted by this command, if unnecessary. 

(2) This command can be sent only once for one receipt prior to other receipt 

commands or print data. If this command is sent in the middle of other commands, 

the printer operation is not guaranteed (Necessary back feeds are not performed, 

and, as a result, the print may be overlapped or the print position is misaligned.) 

This command is effective in the first receipt to be printed after the command is 

received. That is, this command needs to be issued for every receipt before 

printing because the command is effective only one receipt. 

NOTE: When printing more than one receipt continuously, the printer does not stop 

at the top of each receipt because the printer does not recognize the receipt one by 

one. In this case, the Back Feed Omission Command should be issued only for the 

first receipt, not for every receipt. (The printer recognizes the Back Feed Omission 

Command is sent in the middle of other commands, and it may print improperly.) 

(3) If a cover open error or a paper end error occurred before printing, a back feed is 

performed after the error is cleared, even if this command has been issued. Also, 

the printer performs a back feed when printing is restarted after clearing an error 

which occurred during printing. 

7-29



7.7.1 GRAPHIC DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] SG 

Function 

Format 

Stores the graphic data on the printer. 

[ESC] SG ; a, bbbb, cccc, ddd --- ddd [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Graphic No. 

1 or 2 

bbbb: 

cccc: 

ddd --- ddd: 

No. of graphic width dots to be stored 


No. of graphic height dots to be stored 


Graphic data 

Explanation 


1 00H 2 60H 3 00H 

Graphic 

height 

24 dots 

4 00H 5 70H 6 00H 

• 

• 

• 

• 

67 EFH 68 80H 69 00H 

70 3EH 71 00H 72 00H 


(1) The graphic data should be separated into units of 8 dots and sent in the above 

order (1 to 72). 


(3) The minimum unit of a graphic width is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as 

data 0. 

(4) The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted must be as follows; 

The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted = {(No. of graphic width dots 

+ 7)/8} × No. of graphic height dots 


7-30


Example 


Graphic 

height 

24 dots 


[ESC]SG;1,0019,0024, 

[00H][60H][00H][00H][70H][00H][00H][78H][00H] 

[00H][7CH][00H][00H][6EH][00H][00H][67H][00H] 

[00H][63H][80H][00H][61H][80H][00H][61H][C0H] 

[00H][60H][C0H][00H][61H][C0H][00H][61H][80H] 

[00H][63H][80H][00H][67H][C0H][00H][66H][00H] 




[LF][NUL] 

7-31


7.7.2 GRAPHIC PRINT COMMAND [GS] / 

Function 

Prints the graphic data which is stored on the printer. 

Format [GS] /n 

Term n: Graphic No. 

1 or 2 

Explanation 


(2) When the graphic data is not stored, this command is ignored. 


Graphic 

ABC DEF ABC [GS] / 1 DEF [LF] 

Graphic 

GHIJK 

ABC [GS] / 1 GHIJK [LF] 



Refer to 

Graphic Data Store Command ([ESC] SG) 

Mode Select Command ([ESC] M) 

7-32



7.8.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] @, [ESC] WR 

Function 

Format 

Explanation 



[ESC] @ 






Command during printing). In IrDA: TEC Protocol, if ACK/status transmission is 

specified by the Issue Command in the LABEL mode, the printer returns an ACK, 

which indicates the command process end, to the EOT after the printer is initialized. 

In IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooh, or wireless LAN, the printer does not return 

the status. 







7-33



7.9.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] v, [ [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS 

Function 

Format 

Explanation 

Requests that the printer sends back the printer status and the battery status to the host. 

[ESC] v, [ESC] FM [LF] [NUL], or [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL] 

When this command is received, the printer sends the printer status and battery status 

to the host. 




• For IrDA; IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth, or Wireless LAN: 






00H: Normal status (while idling) 












For RS-232C only 

0CH: Communication error (Parity, overrun, framing error) 



(10H: Normal termination): A response sent from the printer only 


mode is designated. 

NOTE: 

This is a state when the printer runs out of labels, after 


7-34




02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V 


03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V 


04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V 







7-35



Function 

Format 

Explanation 






R E C E I P T SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP 

02H 52H 45H 43H 45H 49H 50H 54H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH 


STX 


R E C E I P T SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP 

02H 52H 45H 43H 45H 49H 50H 54H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 

The above is an example where the message is received in the RECEIPT mode (Mode = 1 or 3). When 

the RECEIPT1 mode is selected, the message is “RECEIPT1”. In addition, the message of “LABEL”, 

“TPCL-LE”, or “TPCL-LE1” is returned. 

RECEIPT mode (Mode = 1, 3): 

RECEIPT mode (Mode = 2): 

“RECEIPT” 

“RECEIPT1” 

(2) This command is one of the command types which are processed as they are 

received. Processing takes place starting from the ones received first. Until the 

process of the command previously sent is completed, the next command is not 

processed. Therefore, if the printer is not in the idle state when this command is 

sent, the mode information data may not be returned immediately. 

7-36




Function 

Format 

Explanation 

Calls up the device address of the Bluetooth module or MAC address of the Wireless 



(1) This command calls up the device address of the Bluetooth module or MAC 

addressof the Wireless LAN module. On receiving this command, the printer 

returns the Bluetooth device address or MAC address of the Wireless LAN module 

with the complenents of the following information field. When using the IrDA: TEC 

Protocol, the following information field is placed in the information frame and sent 

in packets. 




[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth, or Wireless 

LAN is used] 

STX 

02H 


12 bytes 

Example 



information. 


[30H] [30H] [30H] [31H] [63H] [63H] [66H] [30H] [30H] [34H] [32H] [62H] 

0 0 0 1 c c f 0 0 4 2 b 

7-37


7.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO MACRO SETTING 

7.11.1 MACRO DEFINITION COMMAND [GS] : 

Function 

Defines the print position and the items to be printed at the fixed position. 

Format [GS] : aaaaa###bbbbbbbbbb#####ccccccc [GS] : 

Term 

Explanation 

aaaaa, bbbbbbbbbb, ccccccc: Fixed data 

#####: Variable data (The character codes are specified by the Macro Execute 

Command.) 

(1) The macro definition can be made by entering the character code or [LF] (Print Line 

Feed Command) between “[GS] :” and “[GS] :”. 

(2) From the start to end of the macro definition, must be a maximum of 253 bytes. 

(3) The macro definition data is kept until the power is turned off. 

(4) The number of digits indicated using “#” must match that for the macro to be 

actually executed. 

(5) Character code designated by the Macro Definition Command is sent to the printer 

for printing it on the receipt. Use of the macro function reduces the number of data 

transmissions by the standard format and transmission time, and increases the 

number of printable lines at one transmission. 

7-38


7.11.2 MACRO EXECUTE COMMAND [GS] ^ [NUL] 

Function 

Format 

Stores data for items for which the macro definitions are made. 

[GS]^ aaaaabbbbbccccc [NUL] 

Term aaaaa: 1st data to be printed 

bbbbb: 2nd data to be printed 

ccccc: 3rd data to be printed 

Explanation 

(1) If this command is sent without making a macro definition by the Macro Definition 

Command, a syntax error will occur. 

(2) The receipt is printed by transferring the character code specified by the Macro 

Definition Command. The No. of times of data transfer and transfer time for 

printing in a fixed format, can be saved. Also, the printable No. of lines per batch 

transfer can be increased by using the macro function. 

[Ex.] [GS] ^0023071T1 A Label 1 ¥9,000 [NUL] 

[GS]: NO.### (####)[LF] 

####################[LF] 

Quantity #####[LF] 

Price ##########[LF] 

––––––––––––––––––––––[LF][GS]: 

The print position and items to 

be printed at the fixed position 

are defined by making a macro 

definition. 

NO.### (####) 

#################### 

Quantity ##### 

Price ########## 

–––––––––––––––––––––––– 

To print data on two or more 

lines, only the variable data 

specified by “#”, is sent using 

the Macro Execute Command. 

[GS]^0023071T1 A Label 1 ¥9,000 [NUL] 

NO.002 (3071) 

T1 A Label 

Quantity 1 

Price ¥9,000 

–––––––––––––––––––––––– 

7-39


7.12 EXAMPLES OF USING COMMANDS 


A B C 

1) Setting the length of a line feed and printing 

characters 

A B C 

2) Aligning characters at the center 

A B C 

D E F 

3) Aligning characters on the left and the right 

4) Line feed only 

AB 

AB 

5) Including characters which have different 

magnifications together. 

* 5 4 3 2 1 * 

6) Printing a bar code 

Graphic 

G H I J K 

7) Including graphics and characters together. 

4 9 4 0 0 4 5 8 

8) Printing a bar code (Aligning at the center) 



[Examples of transmitted data] 

Command/Print data 

Result 

1) [ESC]3[20H] Setting the length of a line feed (32 dots) 

ABC [LF] 

Printing characters and a line feed 

2) [ESC]a1ABC[LF] Alignment of the print position (Center) + Printing and a line feed 

3) [ESC]a0ABC Alignment of the print position (Left) 

[ESC]a2DEF[LF] 

Alignment of the print position (Right) + Printing and a line feed 

4) [LF] Line feed 

5) [ESC]a0 Alignment of the print position (Left) 

AB 

Printing characters (1x1 magnification) * Default (00H) 

[ESC]![10H]AB 

Printing characters (1x2 magnification) 

[ESC]![20H]AB 

Printing characters (2x1 magnification) 

[ESC]![30H]AB[LF] Printing characters (2x2 magnification) + printing and a line feed 

6) [GS]k3*54321*[NUL][LF] Printing CODE39 + printing and a line feed 

7) [GS]/1 Printing a graphic 

[ESC]![00H]GHIJK[LF] Printing characters (1x1 magnification) + printing and a line feed 

8) [ESC]a1 Alignment of the print position (Center) 

[GS]h[50H] 

Setting the height of the bar code (80 dots) 

[GS]k04940045[NUL][LF] Printing EAN8 + printing and a line feed 

7-40

8. ERROR PROCESSING 



This chapter describes details of the printer errors. 

8-1


8.2 OPERATIONS WHEN AN ERROR OCCURS 

If the printer detects an error, the LED will blink (at intervals of 0.1 seconds), the printer stops the 

operation, and reverts to a wait state for a command. 

8.3 OPERATIONS AFTER AN ERROR IS CLEARED 

8.3.1 LABEL MODE 

If the [FEED] switch is pressed, the remaining number of labels is not issued. Since the printer 

issues only the same label as one which is being printed when the error occurs, issue the required 

number of labels by pressing the [FEED] switch. 

8.3.2 RECEIPT MODE (Mode = 1 or 3) 

If the [FEED] switch is pressed, the printer performs a 20-mm feed. 

8.3.3 RECEIPT1 MODE (Mode = 2) 


printing the data which has been received before the error occurred. After paper is replaced, the 

error is cleared when the cover is closed. Then, the printer automatically continues printing. If the 

sensor is designated, the printer feeds the paper to the print start position, then continues printing. 

When the cover is closed, if the printer has run out of the paper, the printer neither clears the error 

nor continues printing. It remains in the error state. In any state other than the above, the printer 

performs a 20-mm feed by pressing the [FEED] switch. 

8.3.4 TPCL-LE MODE 




sensor is designated, the printer feeds the paper to the print start position, then continues printing. 

When the cover is closed, if the printer has run out of the paper, the printer neither clears the error 

nor continues printing. It remains in the error state. In any state other than the above, if the 

sensor is designated, when the cover is closed and the [FEED] switch is pressed, the printer 

performs the specified label pitch length of the feed. If no sensor is designated, the printer 

performs a 20-mm feed. 

8.4 SYNTAX ERRORS OF COMMANDS 

c An error results if a command length error or parameter designation error is found in analyzing the 

command. When the form for the form number designated by the Data Print Command is not 

stored, and the form length designated by the Data Print Command is different from the stored form 

length, an error will occur. 

d If the block number is not consecutive, starting from “0” in the ascending order, an error occurs. 

8.5 PAPER JAM 

If the gap is not detected in spite of feeding 1.5 times the length of the label pitch which is designated 

by the command, an error will occur. (Only in the LABEL and TPCL-LE modes) 

8-2


8.6 LABEL END 

8.6.1 LABEL MODE, RECEIPT MODE (Mode = 1 or 3), TPCL-LE MODE 

c If no label is loaded when an issue or a feed is attempted, an error will occur. 

d If the backing paper is detected for 14 mm continuously, an error will occur. 

e If the label end state is detected for 1 mm continuously, an error will occur. 

8.6.2 RECEIPT1 MODE (Mode = 2) 

c If no label is loaded when an issue or a feed is attempted, an error will occur. 

d If non-printing area is detected for 1.5 mm continuously and the label end state is detected, an 


e If the label end state is detected for 14 mm continuously, an error will occur. 

8.7 NORMAL END + LABEL END 

8.7.1 LABEL MODE, TPCL-LE MODE 

c If the label end is detected after printing the effective print length of the current label, an error 

will occur. 

8.7.2 RECEIPT MODE 

c If the label end is detected after printing the effective print length of the current receipt, an error 

will occur. (e.g. When the 170-mm long print data is printed after printing 170 mm, if the label 

end state is detected, an error will occur.) 

8.8 COVER OPEN ERROR 

c If the cover open state is detected for 5 mm continuously while printing or feeding, an error will 

occur. 

d When printing is attempted even though the cover is opened, an error will occur. 

8.9 BROKEN THERMAL HEAD DOTS ERROR 

c If broken head dots are detected by the broken head dots check when turning the power on or 

closing the cover, an error will occur. 

d If the thermal head driver fails, an error will occur. 

8.10 THERMAL HEAD EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURE 

c If the thermistor detects a high temperature, an error will occur. 

8.11 FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR 

c The printer recognizes an error when writing data in flash ROM fails. 

8-3


8.12 FLASH ROM ERASE ERROR 

d The printer recognizes an error when erasing data in flash ROM (initialization) fails. 

8.13 FLASH ROM STORAGE AREA FULL 

c The printer recognizes an error when the form storage areas, (for form, PC saving, writable 

character, and graphic) in flash ROM become full. 

8.14 LOW BATTERY 

c The LED lights up in red, if printing is disabled because the battery is low. 

8.15 OTHER ERRORS 

c If an undefined command execution error occurs, the printer is automatically reset. 

8-4


8.16 STATUS VALUES 

* Values in the upper cell are provided for the LABEL/RECEIPT mode (1 byte) 

Values in the lower cell are provided for the TPCL-LE mode (3 bytes) 

State 

LED 

indication 

Status by the 


Command 

IrDA: TEC Protocol 

IrDA: IrCOMM 

RS-232C 

Bluetooth 

Wireless LAN 

Power is turned on. Blink in red 

for several 

seconds → 

Blink in green 

(or orange) for 

several 

seconds → 

ON in green 

(or orange) 

Normal state ON in green 00H 

(Idling) 

(or orange) 30H, 30H, 31H 

Cover open 

ON in green 01H 

(or orange) 30H, 31H, 31H 

Syntax errors of Blink in red 

02H 

commands 

(at intervals of 30H, 36H, 31H 

Paper jam 0.1 seconds) 03H 

31H, 31H, 31H 

Label end 

04H 

31H, 33H, 31H 

Cover open error 

05H 

31H, 35H, 31H 

Broken thermal head 

dots error 

Thermal head 

excessive 

temperature 

Flash ROM write error 

Auto status 

transmission 

IrDA: IrCOMM 

RS-232C 

Bluetooth 

Wireless LAN 

Status when the 

command is 

received during an 

error state 

IrDA: TEC Protocol 

IrDA: IrCOMM 

RS-232C 

Bluetooth 

Wireless LAN 

To turn LED off 

RS-232C 

IrDA 

Bluetooth 

Wireless LAN 

Condition of 

clearing error 

RS-232C 

IrDA 

Bluetooth 

Wireless LAN 

— — — — — 

06H 

31H, 37H, 31H 

07H 

31H, 38H, 31H 

— — — — 

— 01H 

30H, 31H, 32H 

02H 

02H 

30H, 36H, 32H 30H, 36H, 32H 

03H 

03H 

31H, 31H, 32H 31H, 31H, 32H 

04H 

04H 

31H, 33H, 32H 31H, 33H, 32H 

05H 

05H 

31H, 35H, 32H 31H, 35H, 32H 

06H 

06H 

31H, 37H, 32H 31H, 37H, 32H 

07H 

31H, 38H, 32H 

07H 

31H, 38H, 32H 

— — 

Close the cover. 

In power save 

mode 

In power save 

mode 



Turn the power 

off. 

Replace the 

thermal head. 


08H 

35H, 30H, 31H 

08H 

35H, 30H, 32H 

08H 

35H, 30H, 32H 

In power save 

mode 

Flash ROM erase 

error 

09H 

35H, 31H, 31H 

09H 

35H, 31H, 32H 

09H 

35H, 31H, 32H 

Low battery ON in red 0AH 

33H, 36H, 31H 

0AH 

33H, 36H, 32H 

0AH 

33H, 36H, 32H 

In power save 

mode 

Charge the 

battery. 

Operating Blink in green 0BH 

— — — — 

30H, 32H, 31H 

Communication error Blink in red 0CH 

0CH 

0CH Close the cover. Close the cover. 

(at intervals of 30H, 37H, 31H 30H, 37H, 32H 30H, 37H, 32H 

Normal end + 

Label end 

0.1 seconds) 0DH 

30H, 39H, 31H 

0DH 

30H, 39H, 32H 

0DH 

30H, 39H, 32H 

In power save 

mode 

Sleep 

ON in green 

— — — — — 

(orange) 

Flash ROM storage 

area full 

0EH 

35H, 34H, 31H 

OEH 

35H, 34H, 32H 

OEH 

35H, 34H, 32H 

Blink in red 

(at intervals of 

0.5 seconds) 


In power save 

mode 

Format the 

relevant storage 

area. 

* The LED goes OFF when: 

• The auto power-off function is performed. (This is the same state when the printer is turned OFF.) 

• The auto power-off time is set to any value other than 1 minute. The LED goes OFF in 5 minutes. 

(This is the same state when the printer is turned OFF.) 

* When the low battery state occurs, the LED remains ON until the printer is turned OFF. 

* If the state changes, the status will be the latest state which has occurred. 

8-5

9. SYSTEM MODE 



This chapter describes details regarding the interface commands for the SYSTEM mode and the 

specifications for the key operations to change the setting. 

9.2 STARTING THE PRINTER IN SYSTEM MODE 

Unlike the TPCL-LE mode, LABEL mode, RECEIPT mode, and RECEIPT1 mode, the SYSTEM mode 

cannot be accessed by the Mode Change Command. The System mode can be accessed by turning 

on the printer while holding down the FEED switch. The FEED switch must be held down until the self 

diagnosis test label is printed. The self diagnosis test label will be printed when the paper has been 

loaded on the printer. When the paper has not been loaded or the cover is opened, however, the LED 

will blink in red. This status can be cleared by closing the cover. 

9-1


9.3 COMMUNICATIONS CONDITIONS 

The fixed communications protocol is used for the SYSTEM mode. 

9.3.1 IrDA 

IrCOMM: 9600 bps or faster, NONE Parity 

TEC Protocol: 19200 bps, NONE parity 

* The IrDA window (upper or front) to be used is according to the setting. 

9.3.2 RS-232C 

9600 bps, EVEN parity 

9.3.3 Bluetooth 

115200 bps, NONE Parity 

9.3.4 WIRELESS LAN 

115200 bps, NONE Parity 

9.4 LIMITATIONS IN SYSTEM MODE 

When the SYSTEM mode is selected, the printer does not enter into the power save mode. 

When the SYSTEM mode is selected, the auto power-off function is not performed. 

The settings specified by any Set Commands are stored into flash ROM, when the printer is turned 

OFF or is initialized by the Initialize Command. They take effect when the printer is turned ON, or after 

initialization is completed. Do not remove the battery during storing the settings, or the data cannot be 

written into flash ROM. 

9-2






z There is the following control code: 

ESC (1BH), LF (0AH), NUL (00H) 


Function 

Format 








in practice. 


transmitted. 

Term 





Explanation 

Note 

Refer to 

Examples 







1B 46 4D 0A 00 

[ESC] F M [LF] [NUL] 





9-3



9.6.1 ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID 

Function 

Format 





b: Wireless LAN IP Address Invalid Setting (Omissible. If omitted, IP address 

setting is effective.) 

0: IP Address setting is invalid. 

Explanation 

Notes 










(4) In case of the wireless LAN model, the printer’s ID will be set as the lower 2-byte 

number of the IP address unless “0” is set to the Wireless LAN IP Address Invalid 

Setting parameter. The upper 2 bytes are fixed to “172.16”. At this time, the 

subnet mask will be set to “255.255.0.0”. 

Example 


[ESC] ID ; [03H] [51H] [LF] [NUL] 


In case of the wireless LAN model, the IP address is “172.16.3.81”. 

9-4



Function 

Format 




7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 




1: Performed 








42H TPCL-LE1 Continues printing (*Firmware V1.5 or greater) 







Explanation 


















LABEL modes. However, the feed is not performed even if this parameter is set to 

1 in the system mode. 

9-5



FEED button. 

Notes 



off). 




















(6) The print position detection feed is ignored when it is specified in the System mode. 

9-6




Function 

Format 






bb: 



c: Print mode 

0: Reserved 

1: Direct thermal 






Explanation (1) If the print mode is set to any value other than “1”, it should be changed to “1" 

(2) The default value for the head output division designation is “1”. 












(7) If the battery level becomes Level 2 when “3: Auto1” is designated for the head 

output division designation, the printer will automatically operate with “divided by 3” 

to keep the print quality. As a result, the issue speed becomes slower. 

9-7


9.7.2 STRIP SENSOR THRESHOLD VALUE SET COMMAND [ESC] AH, [ESC] AZ 

Function 

Format 


[ESC] AH; a [LF] [NUL] 

[ESC] AZ; a [LF] [NUL] 






4: Reserved 



(2) When “1: Threshold value” is set, this command is sent after the backing paper of 

the label to be used, is positioned on the strip issue path and the cover is closed. 

The printer reads the sensor adjustment value for the backing paper, and then sets 

the threshold value to switch the mode between strip and batch. (When this 

command is sent, the backing paper must be loaded on the strip issue path. If the 

backing paper is loaded on the batch issue path, or the label is loaded, and the 

command is sent, the mode will not be switched properly.) 

Notes 




factory. 










this command. 

9-8



9.8.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] WR, [ESC] @ 

Function 

Format 

Explanation 



[ESC] @ 






Command during printing). Even if ACK/status transmission is specified by the 

Issue Command, the printer does not return the status to the host. 







Examples 


9-9



9.9.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS, [ESC] v 

Function 

Format 




[ESC] v 

Explanation 


When receiving this command, the printer sends the printer status and battery status to 

the host. 




• For IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN: Data to be sent (Fixed as 5 

bytes) 



















(10H: normal termination) A response sent from the printer only 


mode is designated. 

NOTE: 

In the LABEL mode, this is a state when the printer runs 

out of labels, after the effective print length is printed. In 

the RECEIPT mode, this status is returned to the host 

when the printer runs out of labels after a receipt is 

issued. 

9-10




02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V 


03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V 


04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V 








This command makes the printer send its status regardless of the status response setting. 

The status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and indicates the latest status 

only. The remaining count indicates the remaining count of the batch currently being 

printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted. 



02H xxH xxH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH xxH XXH 


Remaining No. of labels 

• 0000 to 9999 

Status type 



9-11





Remaining No. of labels (“0000” to “9999”) 

Status type 















(“40”: Normal issue end) For automatic status response 

(“41”: Normal feed end) For automatic status response 




Notes (1) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command. 

(2) A max. delay of 20 msec may occur until the printer sends the status after 

receiving the Status Request Command. 

(3) The interval from when the Status Request Command is sent to when the next 

Status Request Command is sent should be 20 msec or more. If the interval is 

less than 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive the Status Request Command. 

Example 


9-12



Function 

Format 

Explanation 







S Y S T E M SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP 

02H 53H 59H 53H 54H 45H 4DH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH 


SOH STX Mode information (16 bytes) ETX EOT CR LF 


01H 02H 53H 59H 53H 54H 45H 4DH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH 

The above is an example where the message is received in the SYSTEM mode. In addition, the 

message of “LABEL”, “RECEIPT”, or “TPCL-LE” is returned. 





02H 53H 59H 53H 54H 45H 4DH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH 


STX 



02H 53H 59H 53H 54H 45H 4DH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 

The above is an example where the message is received in the SYSTEM mode. In addition, the 

message of “LABEL”, “RECEIPT”, or “TPCL-LE” is returned. 

9-13


9.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO PARAMETER SETTING 

9.10.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND [ESC] ZZ 

Function 

Format 

Sets each parameter on the printer. 

[ESC] ZZ; a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, I [LF] [NUL] 

Term a: Time to the power save mode (* Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

0: 3 sec. 

1: 5 sec. 

2: 10 sec. 

3: 20 sec. 

4: 30 sec. 

b: Model type (Destination) 

1: Fixed 

c: Character code 

0: PC-850 

d: Font of “0” 

0: 0 (without slash) 

e: Baud rate 

0: 9600 bps (for RS-232C) 

19200 bps (for IrDA: TEC Protocol) 

1: 9600 bps (for RS-232C and IrDA: TEC Protocol) 




f: Parity (only for RS-232C) 

0: EVEN 

1: NONE 

g: IrDA protocol type 

0: TEC Protocol 

1: IrCOMM 

h: IrDA window 

0: Upper 

1: Front 

I: Auto power-off time 

0: 1 min. 

1: 5 min. 

2: 30 min. 

3: 120 min. 

4: No function (The auto power off function is inactivated.) 

(* Firmware V1.5 or greater) 

9-14


Explanation 

(1) This command is used for making various settings for printer’s operations. After 

this command is sent, the printer must be restarted by pressing the [POWER] 

switch. If the printer is not restarted, the operations are not guaranteed. 

(2) Communications conditions 

The IrDA window to be used for communications is according to the setting. 

Communication 


type Baud rate Stop bit Data length Parity 

1 bit 8 bits None 

IrDA: IrCOMM 9600, 19200, 38400, 

115200 bps *1 

IrDA: TEC Protocol 19200 bps *2 

RS-232C 9600 bps *2 

Wireless LAN 115200 bps *2 

Bluetooth 115200 bps *2 

*1: The value is according to the communications protocol setting 

*2: The communications conditions are fixed. Therefore, they cannot be changed. 

(3) Update of the settings 

The settings are updated when the printer is turned OFF then ON. 

(4) Factory default settings 

Each factory default setting is described below: 

Item 

Character code 

Font of “0” 

Baud rate 

Parity 

IrDA protocol 

IrDA window 

Auto power-off time 

Time to the power save 

mode 

Factory default value 

0: PC-850 

0: 0 without a slash 

0: 9600 bps (for RS-232C) 

19200 bps (for IrDA: TEC Protocol) 

0: EVEN 

1: IrCOMM 

1: Front 

3: 120 min. 

0: 3 sec. 

9-15




Function 

Format 

Explanation 

Calls up the device address of the Bluetooth interface or MAC address of the wireless 




wireless LAN module. On receiving this command, the printer returns the Bluetooth 

device address or MAC address with the complenents of the following information 

field. When using the IrDA: TEC Protocol, the following information field is placed 

in the information frame and sent in packets. 





[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth, or wireless 

LAN is used] 

SOH STX Bluetooth device address ETX EOT CR LF 

01H 02H 12 bytes 03H 04H 0DH 0AH 





[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, RS-232C, Bluetooth or wireless 

LAN is used] 

STX 

02H 


12 bytes 

Example 



information. 


[30H] [30H] [30H] [31H] [63H] [63H] [66H] [30H] [30H] [34H] [32H] [62H] 

0 0 0 1 c c f 0 0 4 2 b 

9-16


9.12 STATUS PRINTING 

9.12.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

When the printer is turned on while the [FEED] switch is being held down, status printing is 

performed. The [FEED] switch must be held down until the status printing starts. After status 

printing is performed, every time the [FEED] switch is pressed, the slanted line pattern is printed. 

9.12.2 CONTENTS TO BE PRINTED 

• Product name 

• Part number of the printer software (MAIN, BOOT) 

• Version (MAIN, BOOT) 

• Creation date (MAIN, BOOT) 

• Checksum of Kanji 

• Checksum of FONT 

• Printer ID 

• Version No. of each form for the LABEL mode 

• Sensor status 

• Battery charge state 

• Print density fine adjustment value 

• Print position fine adjustment value 

• Strip sensor threshold value 

• Result for the broken head dots check 

• Print mode 

• Head output division 

• Model type (Destination) 

• IrDA protocol 

• Optional device 

• IrDA window 

• Auto power-off time 

• Time to the power save mode 

• Each parameter 

• PCB loop back check 

• Slanted line pattern 

9-17


9.12.3 PRINT SAMPLE 

c Self-test printing (B-SP2D-GH20-QM) 

(0) 

d Self-test printing (B-SP2D-GH30-QM) 

(0) 

e Self-test printing (B-SP2D-GH40-QM) 

(0) 

9-18



Product name 

7FM00434000 

Part number of the printer software 

MAIN 

10MAR2003 V1.0 :xx00 

Version 

Creation date 

Checksum 

BOOT 

10MAR2003 V1.0 :xx00 

Version 

Creation date 

Checksum 

FONT 9100 

Checksum of C/G area 

KANJI 1100 

FORM 8315427090 

2554300000 

Checksum of Kanji area 

Version of form No. (Upper line: No. 10, Lower line: No. 20) 










SENS R:4.3V Reflective sensor 

T:1.2V Transmissive sensor 

P:1.0V Sensor for switching between the strip and batch sensors 

H:+30°c Thermal head temperature sensor 

A:+24°c Ambient temperature sensor 

HEAD OK (2) 

Head output division (Auto, 2, 3, Auto1) 

Broken head dot check result: 

(OK: No broken head dots, NG: Broken head dots) 

9-19


BATT 8.2V (5) 

Battery charge status in 5 levels 

Remaining battery capacity 

ADJ. +03 


FEED 

+10.0mm 

Print position fine adjustment value 

Set value Actual print Set value Actual print 

x.0 mm x.0 mm x.5 mm x.5 mm 



x.3 mm x.2 mm *1 x.8 mm x.7 mm *1 


*1: The reason why “x.3 mm” and “x.8 mm” are actually printed as “x.2 mm” and “x.7 mm”, 

respectively is that the dot density of the print head is 8 dots/mm. The value “x.3 mm” will 

be automatically changed to “x.2 mm”, and “x.8 mm” will be changed to “x.7 mm”. 

PEEL 

+3.0V 

Strip sensor threshold value (BATCH MODE, STRIP MODE) 

MODE 

LABEL 

Print mode (LABEL, RECEIPT, RECEIPT1, TPCL-LE) 

TYPE 

QM 

Model type (Destination) (QM) 

IrDA TEC 115,200 

Baud rate (only for TEC Protocol) (9,600, 19,200, 38,400, 115,200) 

Protocol designation (TEC, IrCOMM) 

UPPER 

IrDA window (UPPER, FRONT) 

OP. 

RS-232C 

Optional device (RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN) 

9,600 EVEN (only for RS-232C) 

Parity (EVEN, NON) 

Baud rate (9,600, 19,200, 38,400, 115,200) 

0001cc400eb6 

P/W 120min (0) 

BD address (for Bluetooth) or MAC address (for Wireless LAN) 

Time to the power save mode 

(3 sec. ⇒ 0, 5 sec. ⇒ 1, 10 sec. ⇒ 2, 20 sec. ⇒ 3, 30 sec. ⇒ 4) 

Auto power-off time (1min, 5min, 30min, 120min, OFF) 

9-20


LOOP 

IR:OK RS:OK 

Option check (RS-232C ⇒ RS, Bluetooth ⇒ BT, Wireless 

LAN ⇒ LN) (OK, NG) 

IrDA check (OK, NG) 

* The special jig is needed to check the RS-232C. Therefore, the result of RS-232C 

check will usually be NG. 

PARA [PC850] [0] 

“0” without a slash (/) 

Character code 

9-21


9.13 SETUP MODE 

9.13.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

The settings can be changed not only by commands but also by the key operations from the 

printer. This section describes how to change the settings by the key operations from the printer. 

9.13.2 PRINTER CONDITIONS TO CHANGE SETTINGS 

SYSTEM mode 

Blank position of the receive buffer (There are no commands to be processed in the receive 

buffer) 

3 or more of the battery levels (When the battery level is 2, the settings cannot be changed.) 

9.13.3 HOW TO ENTER INTO SETUP MODE 

Hold down the [FEED] switch for 3 seconds, with the cover open. 

* Since the switch is held down with the cover open, the cover open error occurs. However, 

ignore it and keep holding down the [FEED] switch. When the printer enters into the setup 

mode, the LED, which is lit in red, will go off. 

* Care must be taken not to keep holding down the [FEED] switch for more 7 seconds after the 

printer enters into the setup mode, as this changes the IrDA interface mode to the forced 

IrCOMM mode. (*Firmware V1.2 or greater) 

9.13.4 HOW TO RETURN TO SYSTEM MODE DURING SETTING 

During the setup mode, when the LED is ON in orange, press the [FEED] switch. 

9.13.5 AUTO POWER-OFF FUNCTION DURING SETTING 

Not performed 

9.13.6 HOW TO CANCEL EACH SETUP MODE 

Close the cover. If the cover is closed while the LED is blinking in green, the printer determines 

the setting to be incomplete. Therefore, the setting is not updated (saved). 

9.13.7 HOW TO CHECK EACH MODE SETTING 

Perform self-test printing and check the result printout. 

9.13.8 OTHER 

The printer does not enter into the power save mode during the setup mode. 

In the setup mode, the [POWER] switch works as the operation key. It does not work to turn the 

printer ON or OFF. After the cover is closed, the [POWER] switch enables to turn the printer ON 

or OFF. 

If the setting is the same as before, it is not written into flash ROM. 

During the setup mode, transmission and reception interrupts through the IrDA, the RS-232C, the 

Bluetooth, or wireless LAN driver are masked. Therefore, communications are disabled. 

The setting made takes effect, after the printer is turned OFF then ON by pressing the [POWER] 

switch in the SYSTEM mode, or when the printer is restarted by the Reset Command. 

9-22


9.13.9 FORCED IrCOMM MODE (*Firmware V1.2 or greater) 

When changing the printer settings by using the setup tool, the TEC Protocol, which is supposed 

to be used in normal operation, is temporarily changed to the IrCOMM until the printer is turned 

off. 

After printing the self test label, hold down the [FEED] switch for 10 seconds with the cover open. 

Though the printer enters into the setup mode in 3 seconds, keep holding down the [FEED] switch 

for more 7 seconds. When the printer enters into the IrCOMM mode, the LED will be ON in 

green. 

9.13.10 SETUP MENU 

The detailed operations of each setup menu are described below. 

SYSTEM mode 

(LED lights up in green) 

Press the 

[FEED] switch 



Setup mode 

is canceled. 

Setup mode 

(LED lights up in orange) 


IrDA communication setup menu 

(LED blinks in orange once) 

Press the 

[FEED] switch 

IrDA communication setup mode 


Close the 

cover 


Baud rate setup menu 

(LED blinks in orange twice) 

Press the 

[FEED] switch 

Baud rate setup mode 



Parity setup menu 

(LED blinks in orange 3 times) 

Press the 

[FEED] switch 

Parity setup mode 



Auto power-off time setup menu 


Press the 

[FEED] switch 

Auto power-off time setup mode 



Press the 

[POWER] switch 

Model type (Destination) setup menu 


Press the 

[FEED] switch 

Model type (Destination) setup mode 


9-23


9.13.11 IrDA COMMUNICATION SETUP MENU 

Setup mode 









IrDA communication setup mode 


IrCOMM (9-Wire) (Upper) 







Setup mode 

is canceled. 

IrCOMM (9-Wire) (Front) 




TEC Protocol (Upper) 




SYSTEM mode 


TEC Protocol (Front) 





9-24


9.13.12 BAUD RATE SETUP MENU 










Baud rate setup mode 


19200 (IrDA), 9600 (RS-232C) 







Setup mode 

is canceled. 

9600 bps 




19200 bps 




SYSTEM mode 


38400 bps 




115200 bps 





9-25


9.13.13 PARITY SETUP MENU 










Parity setup mode 


EVEN 







Setup mode 

is canceled. 

NONE 





SYSTEM mode 



9-26


9.13.14 AUTO POWER-OFF TIME SETUP MENU 










Auto power-off time setup mode 


1 min 







Setup mode 

is canceled. 

5 min 




30 min 




SYSTEM mode 


120 min 



No function (OFF) 





9-27


9.13.15 MODEL TYPE (DESTINATION) SETUP MENU 







Setup mode menu 



Model type (Destination) setup mode 


JP (Not supported) 







Setup mode 

is canceled. 

QM 





SYSTEM mode 



NOTE: 

There are two options for the model type (destination). 

However, “JP” is not supported. 

9-28

10. .OTHER FUNCTIONS 

10. OTHER FUNCTIONS 


This chapter describes the functions of the printer in detail. 

10-1


10.2 REPRINT FUNCTION 

10.2.1 LABEL MODE, TPCL-LE1 MODE 

When the batch issue mode is selected, the same label as the last one issued is printed out by 

pressing the [FEED] switch. When this switch is pressed if no label has been printed, the 

specified label pitch length of one label is fed. (If no sensor is designated, a 20-mm feed is 

performed.) 

In the strip issue mode, since the designation for the number of labels to be issued is ignored, one 

label is issued. Therefore, the required number of labels should be issued by repeatedly pressing 

the [FEED] switch. 

If an error occurs, key entries are ignored. However, the drawing buffer data is kept until the next 

Data Print Command is received. After the error is cleared, one label can be issued, every time 

the [FEED] switch is pressed. 


A label is not issued again, even if the [FEED] switch is pressed. A 20-mm feed is performed, 

every time the [FEED] switch is pressed. 

10.2.3 TPCL-LE MODE 

A label is not issued again, even if the [FEED] switch is pressed. The specified label pitch length 

of a feed is performed, every time the [FEED] switch is pressed. (If no sensor is designated, a 20- 

mm feed is performed.) 

10.3 POWER SAVE MODE 

This printer will enter the power save mode after the printer has been in an idle state for the specified 

‘time to the power save mode’ (factory setting: 3 sec.) to save the power consumption. When the 

printer enters the power save mode, all data in the receive buffer is cleared. During an error state 

(including a low battery state), the printer does not enter the power save mode, but turns off 

according to the auto power off time setting. If the time setting is 5 minutes or longer, however, the 

printer will turn off in 5 minutes. 

The power save mode is cleared when: 

• The IrDA link is established. (TEC Protocol, IrCOMM) 

• RS-232C communications are started. 

• Bluetooth communications are started. 

• Wireless LAN communications are started. 

• The cover is opened or closed. 

• The [FEED] switch is pressed. 

• The [POWER] switch is pressed. 

10-2


10.4 AUTOMATIC LABEL PRINT POSITIONING 

10.4.1 LABEL MODE, TPCL-LE MODE 

When the cover is closed, the label is automatically fed to the first print position. However, if no 

sensor is designated, a feed is not performed. 


Even if the cover is closed, the label is not automatically fed to the first print position. 

10.5 CONTINUOUS PRINTING FUNCTION 

10.5.1 LABEL MODE, RECEIPT MODE (Mode = 1 or 3) 

The continuous printing function is not supported. When an error occurs, the receive buffer is 

entirely cleared. 

10.5.2 RECEIPT1 MODE (Mode = 2), TPCL-LE MODE 




sensor is designated, the printer performs a feed to position the label at the first print position, 

then continues printing. When the cover is closed, if the printer has run out of the paper, the 

printer neither clears the error nor continues printing. It remains in the error state. 

10.6 AUTOMATIC LABEL PRINT POSITIONING AT POWER ON TIME 

If the sensor is designated, the printer performs a feed to position the label at the first print position. 

10.7 BD ADDRESS PRINTING FUNCTION 

When the printer which supports Bluetooth interface is turned ON by holding down the [POWER] 

switch for approximately 5 seconds, the bar code below is printed, regardless of the print mode. 

However, if the bar code is not properly printed due to an error caused by the label end or paper jam, 

the printer does not reprint it. Clear the error, and then try to reprint it by performing the procedure 

from the beginning (the power off state). 

[Bar code sample of Bluetooth device address] 

10-3


10.8 WIRELESS LAN PARAMETER SETTINGS PRINTING FUNCTION 

When the printer on which the wireless LAN module is installed is turned ON by holding down the 

[POWER] switch while the power is off, the printer turns on and prints a wireless LAN parameter 

settings label regardless of the issue mode. If the label is not printed successfully due to an error like 

no paper or feed jam, it is required to load the media correctly, turn off the power, and then retry from 

the beginning. This is because the printer will not print the label even if the error is cleared. 

[Sample of the wireless LAN parameter setting printout] 

RF-LAN PARAMS [100] |TYPE[EU ] 

IP [172.016.000.010] |LPR [ON ] 

GW [000.000.000.000] |DHCP[ON ] 

SUB [255.255.000.000] |CON [INF] 

SOCK[ON ][65535] |AUTH[SKEY] 

WEP [128]|SECU[MD5] |CHAN[07] 

WINS [ON ][000.000.000.000] 

HOST [TTEC ] 

[ ] 

ESSID[TEC ] 

[ ] 

MAC:0010C61CCDA9 

10-4

11. CHARACTER CODE TABLE 



In this chapter, the character code tables are provided. 

11-1


11.2 TIMES ROMAN 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 SP 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C ð Ó - 

1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í Ð ß ± 

2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô = 

3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò ¾ 

4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ 

5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á 1 Õ § 

6 & 6 F V f v å û ª Â ã Í µ ÷ 

7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º À Ã Î þ ¸ 

8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ © Ï Þ ° 

9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨ 

A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û • 

B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹ 

C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ý ³ 

D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ Ý ² 

E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « ¥ Ì 

F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ ´ 

¯ 

 

On the JP model, code 

5CH indicates “¥”. 

11.3 HELVETICA 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 SP 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C ð Ó - 

1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í Ð ß ± 

2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô = 

3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò ¾ 

4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ 

5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á 1 Õ § 

6 & 6 F V f v å û ª Â ã Í µ ÷ 

7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º À Ã Î þ ¸ 

8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ © Ï Þ ° 

9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨ 

A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û • 

B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹ 

C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ý ³ 

D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ Ý ² 

E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « ¥ Ì 

F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ ´ 

¯ 

 



Some characters may 

not be printed, 

depending on point 

sizes. 

11-2


11.4 LETTER GOTHIC 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 SP 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C ð Ó - 

1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í Ð ß ± 

2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô = 

3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò 

4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ 

5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á 1 Õ § 

6 & 6 F V f v å û ª Â ã Í 

7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º À Ã Î þ ¸ 

8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ Ï Þ ° 

9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö Ú ¨ 

A * : J Z j z è Ü Û • 

B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù 

C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ý 

D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ Ý 

E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « ¥ Ì 

F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ ´ 

¯ 

 



11.5 PRESTIGE ELITE 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 SP 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C ð Ó - 

1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í Ð ß ± 

2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô = 

3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò 

4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ 

5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á 1 Õ § 

6 & 6 F V f v å û ª Â ã Í 

7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º À Ã Î þ ¸ 

8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ Ï Þ ° 

9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö Ú ¨ 

A * : J Z j z è Ü Û • 

B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù 

C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ý 

D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ Ý 

E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « ¥ Ì 

F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ ´ 

¯ 

 






sizes. 

11-3


11.6 COURIER 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 SP 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C ð Ó - 

1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í Ð ß ± 

2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô = 

3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò ¾ 

4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ 

5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á 1 Õ § 

6 & 6 F V f v å û ª Â ã Í µ ÷ 

7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º À Ã Î þ ¸ 

8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ © Ï Þ ° 

9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨ 

A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û • 

B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹ 

C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ý ³ 

D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ Ý ² 

E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « ¥ Ì 

F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ ´ 

¯ 

 



11.7 GOTHIC725 BLACK 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 SP 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C ð Ó - 

1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í Ð ß ± 

2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô = 

3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò ¾ 

4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ 

5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á 1 Õ § 

6 & 6 F V f v å û ª Â ã Í µ ÷ 

7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º À Ã Î þ ¸ 

8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ © Ï Þ ° 

9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨ 

A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û • 

B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹ 

C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ý ³ 

D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ Ý ² 

E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « ¥ Ì 

F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ ´ 

¯ 

 



11-4


11.8 PRESENTATION 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 0 @ P ` P C - 

1 ! 1 A Q A Q 

2 " 2 B R B R 

3 # 3 C S C S 

4 $ 4 D T D T 

5 % 5 E U E U 

6 & 6 F V F V 

7 ' 7 G W G W 

8 ( 8 H X H X 

9 ) 9 I Y I Y 

A * : J Z J Z 

B + ; K [ K { 

C , < L \ L | 

D – = M ] M } ¢ 

E . > N ^ N ~ ¥ 

F / ? O _ O 






sizes. 

11.9 STANDARD (12×24) 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 0 @ P ` p C 

1 ! 1 A Q a q 

2 ” 2 B R b r 

3 # 3 C S c s 

4 $ 4 D T d t 

5 % 5 E U e u 

6 & 6 F V f v 

7 ’ 7 G W g w 

8 ( 8 H X h x 

9 ) 9 I Y i y 

A * : J Z j z 

B + ; K [ k { 

C , < L \ l | 

D - = M ] m } 

E . > N ^ n ~ 

F / ? O _ o ¥ 

* The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here. 

11-5


11.10 OCR-A 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 0 P - 

1 1 A Q 

2 " 2 B R 

3 3 C S 

4 $ 4 D T 

5 5 E U 

6 6 F V 

7 7 G W 

8 8 H X 

9 9 I Y 

A J Z 

B + K 

C < L 

D - M 

E . > N ¥ 

F / O ¥ 


5CH indicates “¥”, and 

code 7FH is “ ”. 

11.11 OCR-B 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 0 P 0 - 

1 1 A Q 1 

2 " 2 B R 2 

3 3 C S 3 

4 $ 4 D T 4 

5 5 E U 5 

6 6 F V 6 

7 7 G W 7 

8 8 H X 8 

9 9 I Y 9 

A J Z 

B + K 

C < L 

D - M 

E . > N ¥ 

F / O ¥ 


5CH indicates “¥”, and 

code 7FH is “ ”. 

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%. 

11-6


11.12 PRICE FONT 1/PRICE FONT 2 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 0 - 

1 1 

2 2 

3 3 

4 $ 4 

5 5 

6 6 

7 7 

8 8 

9 9 

A 

B 

C , 

D – 

E . ¥ 

F 



11.13 BOLD CHARACTER 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 0 - 

1 1 

2 2 

3 3 

4 4 

5 5 

6 6 

7 7 

8 8 

9 9 

A 

B 

C 

D - 

E 

F 

11-7


11.14 OUTLINE FONT TEC FONT 1 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 SP 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C - 

1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í C ß ± 

2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó 

3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú 

4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ õ 

5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ § 

6 & 6 F V f v å û ª ã µ ÷ 

7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º 

8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ ° 

9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö 

A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ • 

B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ 

C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ 

D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ² 

E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « ¥ 

F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ 






sizes. 

11.15 OUTLINE FONT PRICE FONT 2 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 

0 SP 0 

1 1 

2 2 

3 3 

4 $ 4 

5 % 5 

6 6 

7 7 

8 8 

9 9 

A 

B 

C , ¥ 

D - 

E . ~ 

F / 






sizes. 

11-8

12. BAR CODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE 



In this chapter, the bar code/two-dimensional code tables are provided. Note that there are some bar 

codes/two-dimensional codes which are not supported, depending on the print mode. 

12-1


12.2 JAN8/EAN8, JAN13/EAN13, UPC-A, UPC-E, ITF, EAN128, MSI, RSS-14, RSS-14 

STACKED, RSS-14 STACKED OMNIDIRECTIONAL, RSS-LIMITED 

2 3 4 5 6 7 

0 0 

1 1 

2 2 

3 3 

4 4 

5 5 

6 6 

7 7 

8 8 

9 9 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

12.3 CODE39 (STANDARD) 

2 3 4 5 6 7 

0 SP 0 P 

1 1 A Q 

2 2 B R 

3 3 C S 

4 $ 4 D T 

5 % 5 E U 

6 6 F V 

7 7 G W 

8 8 H X 

9 9 I Y 

A * J Z 

B + K 

C 

L 

D – M 

E • N 

F / O 

NOTE: 

“*” in the above table is used only as the start/stop codes. 

12-2


12.4 NW-7 

2 3 4 5 6 7 

0 SP 0 

1 1 A a 

2 2 B b 

3 3 C c 

4 $ 4 D d t 

5 5 e 

6 6 

7 7 

8 8 

9 9 

A * : 

B + 

C 

D – 

E • n 

F / 

12.5 CUSTOMER BAR CODE, HIGHEST PRIORITY CUSTOMER BAR CODE 

2 3 4 5 6 7 

0 0 P 

1 1 A Q 

2 2 B R 

3 3 C S 

4 4 D T 

5 5 E U 

6 6 F V 

7 7 G W 

8 8 H X 

9 9 I Y 

A J Z 

B 

K 

C 

L 

D – M 

E 

N 

F 

O 

12-3


12.6 CODE128 

12.6.1 TRANSFER CODE 

– – 2 3 4 5 6 7 



2 STX DC2 " 2 B R b r 





7 BEL ETB ' 7 G W g w 




B VT ESC + ; K [ k { 

C FF FS , < L \ l | 

D CR GS – = M ] m } 

E SO RS . > N ^ n ~ 

F SI US / ? O _ o 

[Drawing code] 

Value Code Table 

12.6.2 HOW TO SEND CONTROL CODE DATA 

NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H) 

SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H) 

STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H) 

to 

GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH) 

RS (1EH) → > ^ (3EH, 5EH) 

US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH) 

12.6.3 HOW TO SEND SPECIAL CODES 

Value 

30 (Character >) → >0 

95 → >1 

96 → >2 

97 → >3 

98 → >4 

99 → >5 

100 → >6 

101 → >7 

102 → >8 

12.6.4 DESIGNATION OF START CODE 

START (CODE A) → >7 

START (CODE B) → >6 

START (CODE C) → >5 

12-4


12.6.5 VALUE CODE TABLE 

VALUE CODE 

A 

CODE 

B 

CODE 

C 

VALUE CODE 

A 

CODE 

B 

CODE 

C 

VALUE CODE 

A 

CODE 

B 

CODE 

C 

0 SP SP 00 36 D D 36 72 BS h 72 

1 ! ! 01 37 E E 37 73 HT i 73 

2 " " 02 38 F F 38 74 LF j 74 

3 # # 03 39 G G 39 75 VT k 75 

4 $ $ 04 40 H H 40 76 FF l 76 

5 % % 05 41 I I 41 77 CR m 77 

6 & & 06 42 J J 42 78 SO n 78 

7 ' ' 07 43 K K 43 79 SI o 79 

8 ( ( 08 44 L L 44 80 DLE p 80 

9 ) ) 09 45 M M 45 81 DC1 q 81 

10 * * 10 46 N N 46 82 DC2 r 82 

11 + + 11 47 O O 47 83 DC3 s 83 

12 , , 12 48 P P 48 84 DC4 t 84 

13 – – 13 49 Q Q 49 85 NAK u 85 

14 . . 14 50 R R 50 86 SYN v 86 

15 / / 15 51 S S 51 87 ETB w 87 

16 0 0 16 52 T T 52 88 CAN x 88 

17 1 1 17 53 U U 53 89 EM y 89 

18 2 2 18 54 V V 54 90 SUB z 90 

19 3 3 19 55 W W 55 91 ESC { 91 

20 4 4 20 56 X X 56 92 FS ¦ 92 

21 5 5 21 57 Y Y 57 93 GS } 93 

22 6 6 22 58 Z Z 58 94 RS ~ 94 

23 7 7 23 59 [ [ 59 95 US DEL 95 

24 8 8 24 60 \ \ 60 96 FNC3 FNC3 96 

25 9 9 25 61 ] ] 61 97 FNC2 FNC2 97 

26 : : 26 62 ^ ^ 62 98 SHIFT SHIFT 98 

27 ; ; 27 63 _ _ 63 99 CODE C CODE C 99 

28 < < 28 64 NUL ` 64 100 CODE B FNC4 CODE B 

29 = = 29 65 SOH a 65 101 FNC4 CODE A CODE A 

30 > > 30 66 STX b 66 102 FNC1 FNC1 FNC1 

31 ? ? 31 67 ETX c 67 

32 @ @ 32 68 EOT d 68 103 START CODE A 

33 A A 33 69 ENQ e 69 104 START CODE B 

34 B B 34 70 ACK f 70 105 START CODE C 

35 C C 35 71 BEL g 71 

12-5


12.7 RSS EXPANDED 

2 3 4 5 6 7 

0 SP 0 P p 

1 ! 1 A Q a q 

2 “ 2 B R b r 

3 FNC1 3 C S c s 

4 4 D T d t 

5 % 5 E U e u 

6 & 6 F V f v 

7 ‘ 7 G W g w 

8 ( 8 H X h x 

9 ) 9 I Y i y 

A * : J Z j z 

B + ; K k 

C , < L l 

D – = M m 

E • > N n 

F / ? O _ O 

12-6


12.8 DATA MATRIX 

12.8.1 FORMAT ID 

The code to be used is designated using the format ID. 

Format ID Code Details 

1 Numerics 0 to 9 space 

2 Letters A to Z space 

3 Alphanumerics, symbols 0 to 9 A to Z space . , - / 

4 Alphanumerics 0 to 9 A to Z space 

5 ASCII (7-bit) 00H to 7FH 

6 ISO (8-bit) 00H to FFH (Kanji) 


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 












B VT ESC + ; K [ k { 

C FF FS , < L \ l | 

D CR GS – = M ] m } 

E SO RS . > N ^ n ~ 

F SI US / ? O _ o 


NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H) 

SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H) 

STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H) 

to 

GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH) 

RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH) 

US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH) 


> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H) 

12-7


12.9 PDF417, MicroPDF417 

12.9.1 MODE/CODE 

The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used. 

[PDF417] 


EXC mode 

Alphanumerics, 

symbols 

0 to 9 A to Z a to z space ! ” 

# $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . 

/ : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ 

_ ` { | } ~ CR HT 

Binary/ASCII Plus 

mode 

Numeric Compaction 

mode 

[MicroPDF417] 

Binary International 

Character Set 

Numerics 0 to 9 

00H to FFH 

Mode 

Details 

Upper case letters, space 

A to Z, space 

Binary international character set 00H to FFH (Kanji) 

Numerics 0 to 9 


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 












B VT ESC + ; K [ k { 

C FF FS , < L \ l | 

D CR GS – = M ] m } 

E SO RS . > N ^ n ~ 

F SI US / ? O _ o 

12-8



NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H) 

SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H) 

STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H) 

to 

GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH) 

RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH) 

US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH) 


> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H) 

12-9


12.10 Maxicode 

Symbol Character 

Value 

Code Set A Code Set B Code Set C Code Set D Code Set E 

Decimal Binary Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal 

0 000000 CR 13 ‘ 96 À 192 à 224 NUL 0 

1 000001 A 65 a 97 Á 193 á 225 SOH 1 

2 000010 B 66 b 98 Â 194 â 226 STX 2 

3 000011 C 67 c 99 Ã 195 ã 227 ETX 3 

4 000100 D 68 d 100 Ä 196 ä 228 EOT 4 

5 000101 E 69 e 101 Å 197 å 229 ENQ 5 

6 000110 F 70 f 102 Æ 198 æ 230 ACK 6 

7 000111 G 71 g 103 Ç 199 ç 231 BEL 7 

8 001000 H 72 h 104 È 200 è 232 BS 8 

9 001001 I 73 i 105 É 201 é 233 HT 9 

10 001010 J 74 j 106 Ê 202 ê 234 LF 10 

11 001011 K 75 k 107 Ë 203 ë 235 VT 11 

12 001100 L 76 l 108 Ì 204 ì 236 FF 12 

13 001101 M 77 m 109 Í 205 í 237 CR 13 

14 001110 N 78 n 110 Î 206 î 238 SO 14 

15 001111 O 79 o 111 Ï 207 ï 239 SI 15 

16 010000 P 80 p 112 Ð 208 ð 240 DLE 16 

17 010001 Q 81 q 113 Ñ 209 ñ 241 DC1 17 

18 010010 R 82 r 114 Ò 210 ò 242 DC2 18 

19 010011 S 83 s 115 Ó 211 ó 243 DC3 19 

20 010100 T 84 t 116 Ô 212 ô 244 DC4 20 

21 010101 U 85 u 117 Õ 213 õ 245 NAK 21 

22 010110 V 86 v 118 Ö 214 ö 246 SYN 22 

23 010111 W 87 w 119 × 215 ÷ 247 ETB 23 

24 011000 X 88 x 120 Ø 216 ø 248 CAN 24 

25 011001 Y 89 y 121 Ù 217 ù 249 EM 25 

26 011010 Z 90 z 122 Ú 218 ú 250 SUB 26 

27 011011 [EC] [EC] [EC] [EC] [EC] 

28 011100 FS 28 FS 28 FS 28 FS 28 [Pad] 

29 011101 GS 29 GS 29 GS 29 GS 29 [Pad] 

30 011110 RS 30 RS 30 RS 30 RS 30 ESC 27 

31 011111 [NS] [NS] [NS] [NS] [NS] 

32 100000 Space 32 ( 123 Û 219 û 251 FS 28 

33 100001 [Pad] [Pad] Ü 220 ü 252 GS 29 

34 100010 “ 34 ) 125 Ý 221 ý 253 RS 30 

35 100011 # 35 ~ 126 Þ 222 þ 254 US 31 

36 100100 $ 36 DEL 127 ß 223 ÿ 255 {C159} 159 

37 100101 % 37 ; 59 ª 170 ¡ 161 NBSP 160 

38 100110 & 38 < 60 ¬ 172 ¨ 168 ¢ 162 

39 100111 ‘ 39 = 61 ± 177 « 171 £ 163 

40 101000 ( 40 > 62 ² 178 ¯ 175 ¤ 164 

41 101001 ) 41 ? 63 ³ 179 ° 176 ¥ 165 

42 101010 ” 42 [ 91 181 ' 180 166 

43 101011 + 43 \ 92 ¹ 185 • 183 § 167 

44 101100 , 44 ] 93 º 186 184 © 169 

45 101101 - 45 ^ 94 ¼ 188 » 187 SHY 173 

46 101110 . 46 _ 95 ½ 189 ¿ 191 ® 174 

47 101111 / 47 Space 32 ¾ 190 {C138} 138 182 

48 110000 0 48 , 44 {C128} 128 {C139} 139 {C149} 149 

49 110001 1 49 . 46 {C129} 129 {C140} 140 {C150} 150 

50 110010 2 50 / 47 {C130} 130 {C141} 141 {C151} 151 

51 110011 3 51 : 58 {C131} 131 {C142} 142 {C152} 152 

52 110100 4 52 @ 64 {C132} 132 {C143} 143 {C153} 153 

53 110101 5 53 ! 33 {C133} 133 {C144} 144 {C154} 154 

54 110110 6 54 | 124 {C134} 134 {C145} 145 {C155} 155 

55 110111 7 55 [Pad] {C135} 135 {C146} 146 {C156} 156 

56 111000 8 56 [2 Shift A] {C136} 136 {C147} 147 {C157} 157 

57 111001 9 57 [3 Shift A] {C137} 137 {C148} 148 {C158} 158 

58 111010 : 58 [Pad] [Latch A] [Latch A] [Latch A] 

59 111011 [Shift B] [Shift A] Space 32 Space 32 Space 32 

60 111100 [Shift C] [Shift C] [Lock In C] [Shift C] [Shift C] 

61 111101 [Shift D] [Shift D] [Shift D] [Lock In D] [Shift D] 

62 111110 [Shift E] [Shift E] [Shift E] [Shift E] [Lock In E] 

63 111111 [Latch B] [Latch A] [Latch B] [Latch B] [Latch B] 

12-10



SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H) 

STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H) 

to 

GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH) 

RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH) 

US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH) 


> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H) 

NOTE: “NUL” code in the table cannot be used. 

12-11


12.11 QR CODE 

12.11.1 MODE SELECTION 

The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji. However, 

since the data compression rate varies depending on the codes, the code to be used should be 

designated by selecting the mode. 




$ % * + - . / : 


K Kanji Shift JIS 


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 












B VT ESC + ; K [ k { 

C FF FS , < L \ l | 

D CR GS - = M ] m } 

E SO RS • > N ^ n ~ 


* The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here. 

FFH data cannot be used when the automatic mode is selected for the mode selection. However, 

it is possible to use the FFH data when in the manual mode. 

12-12



NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H) 

SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H) 

STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H) 

to 

GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH) 

RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH) 

US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH) 


> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H) 

12.12 START/STOP CODE 

Bar code type Start/stop specification Input data Printout 

12345ABC No print 

* 12345ABC No print 

12345ABC * No print 

No Start/Stop Code is attached. 

* 12345ABC * * 12345ABC * 

(V1.0 to V1.1A) 

12345 * ABC No print 

* * 12345ABC No print 

* 12345ABC * * No print 

CODE39 

* 12345 * ABC * No print 

12345ABC * 12345ABC * 

* 12345ABC * 12345ABC * 

12345ABC * * 12345ABC * 

Automatically attached. (V1.2 or greater) 

* 12345ABC * * 12345ABC * 

12345 * ABC * 12345 * ABC * 

* * 12345ABC * * 12345ABC * 

* 12345ABC * * * 12345ABC * * 

* 12345 * ABC * * 12345 * ABC * 

12345678 No print 

a12345678 No print 

12345678c No print 

Omitted (not specified). (V1.0 to V1.1A) 

b12345678d B12345678d 

12345a678 No print 

ab12345678 No print 

a12345678bc a12345678bc 

NW7 

d12345b678c d12345b678c 

12345678 12345678 

a12345678 a12345678 

12345678c 12345678c 

No start/stop code is attached. 

b12345678d b12345678d 

(V1.2 or greater) 

12345a678 12345a678 

ab12345678 ab12345678 

a12345678bc a12345678bc 

d12345b678c d12345b678c 

12-13

13. PRINT SAMPLE 


13.1 BIT MAP FONT 

* Alphabet in the parentheses ( ) are font types in the TPCL-LE mode. 

(a) (v) Standard Character/1-byte Kanji (12 x 24 dots) (LABEL/RECEIPT Mode: A, C) 

(b) Bold Character (48 x 96 dots) (LABEL/RECEIPT Mode: B) 

(d) Price Font 1 (16 x 40 dots) (LABEL/RECEIPT Mode: D) 

(e) Price Font 2 (32 x 48 dots) (LABEL/RECEIPT Mode: E) 

(U) 1-byte Kanji (8 x 16 dots) (LABEL Mode: P) 

(o) (q) Gothic 725 Black (6 point) (LABEL/RECEIPT Mode: O) 

(A) Times Roman (Medium) 12 point 

(B) Times Roman (Medium) 15 point 

13-1


(C) Times Roman (Bold) 15 point 

(D) Times Roman (Bold) 18 point 

(E) Times Roman (Bold) 21 point (LABEL/RECEIPT Mode: F) 

(F) Times Roman (Italic) 18 point 

(G) Helvetica (Medium) 9 point 

13-2


(H) Helvetica (Medium) 15 point 

(I) Helvetica (Medium) 18 point 

(J) Helvetica (Bold) 18 point (LABEL/RECEIPT Mode: G) 

(K) Helvetica (Bold) 21 point 

(L) Helvetica (Italic) 18 point 

13-3


(M) Presentation (Bold) 27 point (LABEL/RECEIPT Mode: J) 

(N) Letter Gothic (Medium) 14.3 point (LABEL/RECEIPT Mode: H) 

(O) Prestige Elite (Medium) 10.5 point 

(P) Prestige Elite (Bold) 10.5 point 

(Q) Courier (Medium) 15 point (LABEL/RECEIPT Mode: 

(R) Courier (Bold) 18 point 

13-4


(S) OCR-A 12 point 

(T) OCR-B 12 point 

13.2 OUTLINE FONT 

(A) (B) TEC Font 1 

(F) Price Font 2 

13-5

B-SP2D Series External Equipment Interface ... - Toshiba Tec Italia

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?